This is
/usr/local/google/home/jnewlin/src/uclibc/buildroot/output/build/glibc-2.19/build/manual/libc.info,
produced by makeinfo version 4.13 from libc.texinfo.

INFO-DIR-SECTION Software libraries
START-INFO-DIR-ENTRY
* Libc: (libc).                 C library.
END-INFO-DIR-ENTRY

INFO-DIR-SECTION GNU C library functions and macros
START-INFO-DIR-ENTRY
* ALTWERASE: (libc)Local Modes.
* ARGP_ERR_UNKNOWN: (libc)Argp Parser Functions.
* ARG_MAX: (libc)General Limits.
* BC_BASE_MAX: (libc)Utility Limits.
* BC_DIM_MAX: (libc)Utility Limits.
* BC_SCALE_MAX: (libc)Utility Limits.
* BC_STRING_MAX: (libc)Utility Limits.
* BRKINT: (libc)Input Modes.
* BUFSIZ: (libc)Controlling Buffering.
* CCTS_OFLOW: (libc)Control Modes.
* CHILD_MAX: (libc)General Limits.
* CIGNORE: (libc)Control Modes.
* CLK_TCK: (libc)Processor Time.
* CLOCAL: (libc)Control Modes.
* CLOCKS_PER_SEC: (libc)CPU Time.
* COLL_WEIGHTS_MAX: (libc)Utility Limits.
* CPU_CLR: (libc)CPU Affinity.
* CPU_ISSET: (libc)CPU Affinity.
* CPU_SET: (libc)CPU Affinity.
* CPU_SETSIZE: (libc)CPU Affinity.
* CPU_ZERO: (libc)CPU Affinity.
* CREAD: (libc)Control Modes.
* CRTS_IFLOW: (libc)Control Modes.
* CS5: (libc)Control Modes.
* CS6: (libc)Control Modes.
* CS7: (libc)Control Modes.
* CS8: (libc)Control Modes.
* CSIZE: (libc)Control Modes.
* CSTOPB: (libc)Control Modes.
* DES_FAILED: (libc)DES Encryption.
* DTTOIF: (libc)Directory Entries.
* E2BIG: (libc)Error Codes.
* EACCES: (libc)Error Codes.
* EADDRINUSE: (libc)Error Codes.
* EADDRNOTAVAIL: (libc)Error Codes.
* EADV: (libc)Error Codes.
* EAFNOSUPPORT: (libc)Error Codes.
* EAGAIN: (libc)Error Codes.
* EALREADY: (libc)Error Codes.
* EAUTH: (libc)Error Codes.
* EBACKGROUND: (libc)Error Codes.
* EBADE: (libc)Error Codes.
* EBADF: (libc)Error Codes.
* EBADFD: (libc)Error Codes.
* EBADMSG: (libc)Error Codes.
* EBADR: (libc)Error Codes.
* EBADRPC: (libc)Error Codes.
* EBADRQC: (libc)Error Codes.
* EBADSLT: (libc)Error Codes.
* EBFONT: (libc)Error Codes.
* EBUSY: (libc)Error Codes.
* ECANCELED: (libc)Error Codes.
* ECHILD: (libc)Error Codes.
* ECHO: (libc)Local Modes.
* ECHOCTL: (libc)Local Modes.
* ECHOE: (libc)Local Modes.
* ECHOK: (libc)Local Modes.
* ECHOKE: (libc)Local Modes.
* ECHONL: (libc)Local Modes.
* ECHOPRT: (libc)Local Modes.
* ECHRNG: (libc)Error Codes.
* ECOMM: (libc)Error Codes.
* ECONNABORTED: (libc)Error Codes.
* ECONNREFUSED: (libc)Error Codes.
* ECONNRESET: (libc)Error Codes.
* ED: (libc)Error Codes.
* EDEADLK: (libc)Error Codes.
* EDEADLOCK: (libc)Error Codes.
* EDESTADDRREQ: (libc)Error Codes.
* EDIED: (libc)Error Codes.
* EDOM: (libc)Error Codes.
* EDOTDOT: (libc)Error Codes.
* EDQUOT: (libc)Error Codes.
* EEXIST: (libc)Error Codes.
* EFAULT: (libc)Error Codes.
* EFBIG: (libc)Error Codes.
* EFTYPE: (libc)Error Codes.
* EGRATUITOUS: (libc)Error Codes.
* EGREGIOUS: (libc)Error Codes.
* EHOSTDOWN: (libc)Error Codes.
* EHOSTUNREACH: (libc)Error Codes.
* EHWPOISON: (libc)Error Codes.
* EIDRM: (libc)Error Codes.
* EIEIO: (libc)Error Codes.
* EILSEQ: (libc)Error Codes.
* EINPROGRESS: (libc)Error Codes.
* EINTR: (libc)Error Codes.
* EINVAL: (libc)Error Codes.
* EIO: (libc)Error Codes.
* EISCONN: (libc)Error Codes.
* EISDIR: (libc)Error Codes.
* EISNAM: (libc)Error Codes.
* EKEYEXPIRED: (libc)Error Codes.
* EKEYREJECTED: (libc)Error Codes.
* EKEYREVOKED: (libc)Error Codes.
* EL2HLT: (libc)Error Codes.
* EL2NSYNC: (libc)Error Codes.
* EL3HLT: (libc)Error Codes.
* EL3RST: (libc)Error Codes.
* ELIBACC: (libc)Error Codes.
* ELIBBAD: (libc)Error Codes.
* ELIBEXEC: (libc)Error Codes.
* ELIBMAX: (libc)Error Codes.
* ELIBSCN: (libc)Error Codes.
* ELNRNG: (libc)Error Codes.
* ELOOP: (libc)Error Codes.
* EMEDIUMTYPE: (libc)Error Codes.
* EMFILE: (libc)Error Codes.
* EMLINK: (libc)Error Codes.
* EMSGSIZE: (libc)Error Codes.
* EMULTIHOP: (libc)Error Codes.
* ENAMETOOLONG: (libc)Error Codes.
* ENAVAIL: (libc)Error Codes.
* ENEEDAUTH: (libc)Error Codes.
* ENETDOWN: (libc)Error Codes.
* ENETRESET: (libc)Error Codes.
* ENETUNREACH: (libc)Error Codes.
* ENFILE: (libc)Error Codes.
* ENOANO: (libc)Error Codes.
* ENOBUFS: (libc)Error Codes.
* ENOCSI: (libc)Error Codes.
* ENODATA: (libc)Error Codes.
* ENODEV: (libc)Error Codes.
* ENOENT: (libc)Error Codes.
* ENOEXEC: (libc)Error Codes.
* ENOKEY: (libc)Error Codes.
* ENOLCK: (libc)Error Codes.
* ENOLINK: (libc)Error Codes.
* ENOMEDIUM: (libc)Error Codes.
* ENOMEM: (libc)Error Codes.
* ENOMSG: (libc)Error Codes.
* ENONET: (libc)Error Codes.
* ENOPKG: (libc)Error Codes.
* ENOPROTOOPT: (libc)Error Codes.
* ENOSPC: (libc)Error Codes.
* ENOSR: (libc)Error Codes.
* ENOSTR: (libc)Error Codes.
* ENOSYS: (libc)Error Codes.
* ENOTBLK: (libc)Error Codes.
* ENOTCONN: (libc)Error Codes.
* ENOTDIR: (libc)Error Codes.
* ENOTEMPTY: (libc)Error Codes.
* ENOTNAM: (libc)Error Codes.
* ENOTRECOVERABLE: (libc)Error Codes.
* ENOTSOCK: (libc)Error Codes.
* ENOTSUP: (libc)Error Codes.
* ENOTTY: (libc)Error Codes.
* ENOTUNIQ: (libc)Error Codes.
* ENXIO: (libc)Error Codes.
* EOF: (libc)EOF and Errors.
* EOPNOTSUPP: (libc)Error Codes.
* EOVERFLOW: (libc)Error Codes.
* EOWNERDEAD: (libc)Error Codes.
* EPERM: (libc)Error Codes.
* EPFNOSUPPORT: (libc)Error Codes.
* EPIPE: (libc)Error Codes.
* EPROCLIM: (libc)Error Codes.
* EPROCUNAVAIL: (libc)Error Codes.
* EPROGMISMATCH: (libc)Error Codes.
* EPROGUNAVAIL: (libc)Error Codes.
* EPROTO: (libc)Error Codes.
* EPROTONOSUPPORT: (libc)Error Codes.
* EPROTOTYPE: (libc)Error Codes.
* EQUIV_CLASS_MAX: (libc)Utility Limits.
* ERANGE: (libc)Error Codes.
* EREMCHG: (libc)Error Codes.
* EREMOTE: (libc)Error Codes.
* EREMOTEIO: (libc)Error Codes.
* ERESTART: (libc)Error Codes.
* ERFKILL: (libc)Error Codes.
* EROFS: (libc)Error Codes.
* ERPCMISMATCH: (libc)Error Codes.
* ESHUTDOWN: (libc)Error Codes.
* ESOCKTNOSUPPORT: (libc)Error Codes.
* ESPIPE: (libc)Error Codes.
* ESRCH: (libc)Error Codes.
* ESRMNT: (libc)Error Codes.
* ESTALE: (libc)Error Codes.
* ESTRPIPE: (libc)Error Codes.
* ETIME: (libc)Error Codes.
* ETIMEDOUT: (libc)Error Codes.
* ETOOMANYREFS: (libc)Error Codes.
* ETXTBSY: (libc)Error Codes.
* EUCLEAN: (libc)Error Codes.
* EUNATCH: (libc)Error Codes.
* EUSERS: (libc)Error Codes.
* EWOULDBLOCK: (libc)Error Codes.
* EXDEV: (libc)Error Codes.
* EXFULL: (libc)Error Codes.
* EXIT_FAILURE: (libc)Exit Status.
* EXIT_SUCCESS: (libc)Exit Status.
* EXPR_NEST_MAX: (libc)Utility Limits.
* FD_CLOEXEC: (libc)Descriptor Flags.
* FD_CLR: (libc)Waiting for I/O.
* FD_ISSET: (libc)Waiting for I/O.
* FD_SET: (libc)Waiting for I/O.
* FD_SETSIZE: (libc)Waiting for I/O.
* FD_ZERO: (libc)Waiting for I/O.
* FILENAME_MAX: (libc)Limits for Files.
* FLUSHO: (libc)Local Modes.
* FOPEN_MAX: (libc)Opening Streams.
* FP_ILOGB0: (libc)Exponents and Logarithms.
* FP_ILOGBNAN: (libc)Exponents and Logarithms.
* F_DUPFD: (libc)Duplicating Descriptors.
* F_GETFD: (libc)Descriptor Flags.
* F_GETFL: (libc)Getting File Status Flags.
* F_GETLK: (libc)File Locks.
* F_GETOWN: (libc)Interrupt Input.
* F_OK: (libc)Testing File Access.
* F_SETFD: (libc)Descriptor Flags.
* F_SETFL: (libc)Getting File Status Flags.
* F_SETLK: (libc)File Locks.
* F_SETLKW: (libc)File Locks.
* F_SETOWN: (libc)Interrupt Input.
* HUGE_VAL: (libc)Math Error Reporting.
* HUGE_VALF: (libc)Math Error Reporting.
* HUGE_VALL: (libc)Math Error Reporting.
* HUPCL: (libc)Control Modes.
* I: (libc)Complex Numbers.
* ICANON: (libc)Local Modes.
* ICRNL: (libc)Input Modes.
* IEXTEN: (libc)Local Modes.
* IFNAMSIZ: (libc)Interface Naming.
* IFTODT: (libc)Directory Entries.
* IGNBRK: (libc)Input Modes.
* IGNCR: (libc)Input Modes.
* IGNPAR: (libc)Input Modes.
* IMAXBEL: (libc)Input Modes.
* INADDR_ANY: (libc)Host Address Data Type.
* INADDR_BROADCAST: (libc)Host Address Data Type.
* INADDR_LOOPBACK: (libc)Host Address Data Type.
* INADDR_NONE: (libc)Host Address Data Type.
* INFINITY: (libc)Infinity and NaN.
* INLCR: (libc)Input Modes.
* INPCK: (libc)Input Modes.
* IPPORT_RESERVED: (libc)Ports.
* IPPORT_USERRESERVED: (libc)Ports.
* ISIG: (libc)Local Modes.
* ISTRIP: (libc)Input Modes.
* IXANY: (libc)Input Modes.
* IXOFF: (libc)Input Modes.
* IXON: (libc)Input Modes.
* LINE_MAX: (libc)Utility Limits.
* LINK_MAX: (libc)Limits for Files.
* L_ctermid: (libc)Identifying the Terminal.
* L_cuserid: (libc)Who Logged In.
* L_tmpnam: (libc)Temporary Files.
* MAXNAMLEN: (libc)Limits for Files.
* MAXSYMLINKS: (libc)Symbolic Links.
* MAX_CANON: (libc)Limits for Files.
* MAX_INPUT: (libc)Limits for Files.
* MB_CUR_MAX: (libc)Selecting the Conversion.
* MB_LEN_MAX: (libc)Selecting the Conversion.
* MDMBUF: (libc)Control Modes.
* MSG_DONTROUTE: (libc)Socket Data Options.
* MSG_OOB: (libc)Socket Data Options.
* MSG_PEEK: (libc)Socket Data Options.
* NAME_MAX: (libc)Limits for Files.
* NAN: (libc)Infinity and NaN.
* NCCS: (libc)Mode Data Types.
* NGROUPS_MAX: (libc)General Limits.
* NOFLSH: (libc)Local Modes.
* NOKERNINFO: (libc)Local Modes.
* NSIG: (libc)Standard Signals.
* NULL: (libc)Null Pointer Constant.
* ONLCR: (libc)Output Modes.
* ONOEOT: (libc)Output Modes.
* OPEN_MAX: (libc)General Limits.
* OPOST: (libc)Output Modes.
* OXTABS: (libc)Output Modes.
* O_ACCMODE: (libc)Access Modes.
* O_APPEND: (libc)Operating Modes.
* O_ASYNC: (libc)Operating Modes.
* O_CREAT: (libc)Open-time Flags.
* O_EXCL: (libc)Open-time Flags.
* O_EXEC: (libc)Access Modes.
* O_EXLOCK: (libc)Open-time Flags.
* O_FSYNC: (libc)Operating Modes.
* O_IGNORE_CTTY: (libc)Open-time Flags.
* O_NDELAY: (libc)Operating Modes.
* O_NOATIME: (libc)Operating Modes.
* O_NOCTTY: (libc)Open-time Flags.
* O_NOLINK: (libc)Open-time Flags.
* O_NONBLOCK: (libc)Open-time Flags.
* O_NONBLOCK: (libc)Operating Modes.
* O_NOTRANS: (libc)Open-time Flags.
* O_RDONLY: (libc)Access Modes.
* O_RDWR: (libc)Access Modes.
* O_READ: (libc)Access Modes.
* O_SHLOCK: (libc)Open-time Flags.
* O_SYNC: (libc)Operating Modes.
* O_TRUNC: (libc)Open-time Flags.
* O_WRITE: (libc)Access Modes.
* O_WRONLY: (libc)Access Modes.
* PARENB: (libc)Control Modes.
* PARMRK: (libc)Input Modes.
* PARODD: (libc)Control Modes.
* PATH_MAX: (libc)Limits for Files.
* PA_FLAG_MASK: (libc)Parsing a Template String.
* PENDIN: (libc)Local Modes.
* PF_FILE: (libc)Local Namespace Details.
* PF_INET6: (libc)Internet Namespace.
* PF_INET: (libc)Internet Namespace.
* PF_LOCAL: (libc)Local Namespace Details.
* PF_UNIX: (libc)Local Namespace Details.
* PIPE_BUF: (libc)Limits for Files.
* P_tmpdir: (libc)Temporary Files.
* RAND_MAX: (libc)ISO Random.
* RE_DUP_MAX: (libc)General Limits.
* RLIM_INFINITY: (libc)Limits on Resources.
* R_OK: (libc)Testing File Access.
* SA_NOCLDSTOP: (libc)Flags for Sigaction.
* SA_ONSTACK: (libc)Flags for Sigaction.
* SA_RESTART: (libc)Flags for Sigaction.
* SEEK_CUR: (libc)File Positioning.
* SEEK_END: (libc)File Positioning.
* SEEK_SET: (libc)File Positioning.
* SIGABRT: (libc)Program Error Signals.
* SIGALRM: (libc)Alarm Signals.
* SIGBUS: (libc)Program Error Signals.
* SIGCHLD: (libc)Job Control Signals.
* SIGCLD: (libc)Job Control Signals.
* SIGCONT: (libc)Job Control Signals.
* SIGEMT: (libc)Program Error Signals.
* SIGFPE: (libc)Program Error Signals.
* SIGHUP: (libc)Termination Signals.
* SIGILL: (libc)Program Error Signals.
* SIGINFO: (libc)Miscellaneous Signals.
* SIGINT: (libc)Termination Signals.
* SIGIO: (libc)Asynchronous I/O Signals.
* SIGIOT: (libc)Program Error Signals.
* SIGKILL: (libc)Termination Signals.
* SIGLOST: (libc)Operation Error Signals.
* SIGPIPE: (libc)Operation Error Signals.
* SIGPOLL: (libc)Asynchronous I/O Signals.
* SIGPROF: (libc)Alarm Signals.
* SIGQUIT: (libc)Termination Signals.
* SIGSEGV: (libc)Program Error Signals.
* SIGSTOP: (libc)Job Control Signals.
* SIGSYS: (libc)Program Error Signals.
* SIGTERM: (libc)Termination Signals.
* SIGTRAP: (libc)Program Error Signals.
* SIGTSTP: (libc)Job Control Signals.
* SIGTTIN: (libc)Job Control Signals.
* SIGTTOU: (libc)Job Control Signals.
* SIGURG: (libc)Asynchronous I/O Signals.
* SIGUSR1: (libc)Miscellaneous Signals.
* SIGUSR2: (libc)Miscellaneous Signals.
* SIGVTALRM: (libc)Alarm Signals.
* SIGWINCH: (libc)Miscellaneous Signals.
* SIGXCPU: (libc)Operation Error Signals.
* SIGXFSZ: (libc)Operation Error Signals.
* SIG_ERR: (libc)Basic Signal Handling.
* SOCK_DGRAM: (libc)Communication Styles.
* SOCK_RAW: (libc)Communication Styles.
* SOCK_RDM: (libc)Communication Styles.
* SOCK_SEQPACKET: (libc)Communication Styles.
* SOCK_STREAM: (libc)Communication Styles.
* SOL_SOCKET: (libc)Socket-Level Options.
* SSIZE_MAX: (libc)General Limits.
* STREAM_MAX: (libc)General Limits.
* SUN_LEN: (libc)Local Namespace Details.
* SV_INTERRUPT: (libc)BSD Handler.
* SV_ONSTACK: (libc)BSD Handler.
* SV_RESETHAND: (libc)BSD Handler.
* S_IFMT: (libc)Testing File Type.
* S_ISBLK: (libc)Testing File Type.
* S_ISCHR: (libc)Testing File Type.
* S_ISDIR: (libc)Testing File Type.
* S_ISFIFO: (libc)Testing File Type.
* S_ISLNK: (libc)Testing File Type.
* S_ISREG: (libc)Testing File Type.
* S_ISSOCK: (libc)Testing File Type.
* S_TYPEISMQ: (libc)Testing File Type.
* S_TYPEISSEM: (libc)Testing File Type.
* S_TYPEISSHM: (libc)Testing File Type.
* TMP_MAX: (libc)Temporary Files.
* TOSTOP: (libc)Local Modes.
* TZNAME_MAX: (libc)General Limits.
* VDISCARD: (libc)Other Special.
* VDSUSP: (libc)Signal Characters.
* VEOF: (libc)Editing Characters.
* VEOL2: (libc)Editing Characters.
* VEOL: (libc)Editing Characters.
* VERASE: (libc)Editing Characters.
* VINTR: (libc)Signal Characters.
* VKILL: (libc)Editing Characters.
* VLNEXT: (libc)Other Special.
* VMIN: (libc)Noncanonical Input.
* VQUIT: (libc)Signal Characters.
* VREPRINT: (libc)Editing Characters.
* VSTART: (libc)Start/Stop Characters.
* VSTATUS: (libc)Other Special.
* VSTOP: (libc)Start/Stop Characters.
* VSUSP: (libc)Signal Characters.
* VTIME: (libc)Noncanonical Input.
* VWERASE: (libc)Editing Characters.
* WCHAR_MAX: (libc)Extended Char Intro.
* WCHAR_MIN: (libc)Extended Char Intro.
* WCOREDUMP: (libc)Process Completion Status.
* WEOF: (libc)EOF and Errors.
* WEOF: (libc)Extended Char Intro.
* WEXITSTATUS: (libc)Process Completion Status.
* WIFEXITED: (libc)Process Completion Status.
* WIFSIGNALED: (libc)Process Completion Status.
* WIFSTOPPED: (libc)Process Completion Status.
* WSTOPSIG: (libc)Process Completion Status.
* WTERMSIG: (libc)Process Completion Status.
* W_OK: (libc)Testing File Access.
* X_OK: (libc)Testing File Access.
* _Complex_I: (libc)Complex Numbers.
* _Exit: (libc)Termination Internals.
* _IOFBF: (libc)Controlling Buffering.
* _IOLBF: (libc)Controlling Buffering.
* _IONBF: (libc)Controlling Buffering.
* _Imaginary_I: (libc)Complex Numbers.
* _PATH_UTMP: (libc)Manipulating the Database.
* _PATH_WTMP: (libc)Manipulating the Database.
* _POSIX2_C_DEV: (libc)System Options.
* _POSIX2_C_VERSION: (libc)Version Supported.
* _POSIX2_FORT_DEV: (libc)System Options.
* _POSIX2_FORT_RUN: (libc)System Options.
* _POSIX2_LOCALEDEF: (libc)System Options.
* _POSIX2_SW_DEV: (libc)System Options.
* _POSIX_CHOWN_RESTRICTED: (libc)Options for Files.
* _POSIX_JOB_CONTROL: (libc)System Options.
* _POSIX_NO_TRUNC: (libc)Options for Files.
* _POSIX_SAVED_IDS: (libc)System Options.
* _POSIX_VDISABLE: (libc)Options for Files.
* _POSIX_VERSION: (libc)Version Supported.
* __fbufsize: (libc)Controlling Buffering.
* __flbf: (libc)Controlling Buffering.
* __fpending: (libc)Controlling Buffering.
* __fpurge: (libc)Flushing Buffers.
* __freadable: (libc)Opening Streams.
* __freading: (libc)Opening Streams.
* __fsetlocking: (libc)Streams and Threads.
* __fwritable: (libc)Opening Streams.
* __fwriting: (libc)Opening Streams.
* __gconv_end_fct: (libc)glibc iconv Implementation.
* __gconv_fct: (libc)glibc iconv Implementation.
* __gconv_init_fct: (libc)glibc iconv Implementation.
* __ppc_get_timebase: (libc)PowerPC.
* __ppc_get_timebase_freq: (libc)PowerPC.
* __ppc_mdoio: (libc)PowerPC.
* __ppc_mdoom: (libc)PowerPC.
* __ppc_set_ppr_low: (libc)PowerPC.
* __ppc_set_ppr_med: (libc)PowerPC.
* __ppc_set_ppr_med_low: (libc)PowerPC.
* __ppc_yield: (libc)PowerPC.
* __va_copy: (libc)Argument Macros.
* _exit: (libc)Termination Internals.
* _flushlbf: (libc)Flushing Buffers.
* _tolower: (libc)Case Conversion.
* _toupper: (libc)Case Conversion.
* a64l: (libc)Encode Binary Data.
* abort: (libc)Aborting a Program.
* abs: (libc)Absolute Value.
* accept: (libc)Accepting Connections.
* access: (libc)Testing File Access.
* acos: (libc)Inverse Trig Functions.
* acosf: (libc)Inverse Trig Functions.
* acosh: (libc)Hyperbolic Functions.
* acoshf: (libc)Hyperbolic Functions.
* acoshl: (libc)Hyperbolic Functions.
* acosl: (libc)Inverse Trig Functions.
* addmntent: (libc)mtab.
* addseverity: (libc)Adding Severity Classes.
* adjtime: (libc)High-Resolution Calendar.
* adjtimex: (libc)High-Resolution Calendar.
* aio_cancel64: (libc)Cancel AIO Operations.
* aio_cancel: (libc)Cancel AIO Operations.
* aio_error64: (libc)Status of AIO Operations.
* aio_error: (libc)Status of AIO Operations.
* aio_fsync64: (libc)Synchronizing AIO Operations.
* aio_fsync: (libc)Synchronizing AIO Operations.
* aio_init: (libc)Configuration of AIO.
* aio_read64: (libc)Asynchronous Reads/Writes.
* aio_read: (libc)Asynchronous Reads/Writes.
* aio_return64: (libc)Status of AIO Operations.
* aio_return: (libc)Status of AIO Operations.
* aio_suspend64: (libc)Synchronizing AIO Operations.
* aio_suspend: (libc)Synchronizing AIO Operations.
* aio_write64: (libc)Asynchronous Reads/Writes.
* aio_write: (libc)Asynchronous Reads/Writes.
* alarm: (libc)Setting an Alarm.
* aligned_alloc: (libc)Aligned Memory Blocks.
* alloca: (libc)Variable Size Automatic.
* alphasort64: (libc)Scanning Directory Content.
* alphasort: (libc)Scanning Directory Content.
* argp_error: (libc)Argp Helper Functions.
* argp_failure: (libc)Argp Helper Functions.
* argp_help: (libc)Argp Help.
* argp_parse: (libc)Argp.
* argp_state_help: (libc)Argp Helper Functions.
* argp_usage: (libc)Argp Helper Functions.
* argz_add: (libc)Argz Functions.
* argz_add_sep: (libc)Argz Functions.
* argz_append: (libc)Argz Functions.
* argz_count: (libc)Argz Functions.
* argz_create: (libc)Argz Functions.
* argz_create_sep: (libc)Argz Functions.
* argz_delete: (libc)Argz Functions.
* argz_extract: (libc)Argz Functions.
* argz_insert: (libc)Argz Functions.
* argz_next: (libc)Argz Functions.
* argz_replace: (libc)Argz Functions.
* argz_stringify: (libc)Argz Functions.
* asctime: (libc)Formatting Calendar Time.
* asctime_r: (libc)Formatting Calendar Time.
* asin: (libc)Inverse Trig Functions.
* asinf: (libc)Inverse Trig Functions.
* asinh: (libc)Hyperbolic Functions.
* asinhf: (libc)Hyperbolic Functions.
* asinhl: (libc)Hyperbolic Functions.
* asinl: (libc)Inverse Trig Functions.
* asprintf: (libc)Dynamic Output.
* assert: (libc)Consistency Checking.
* assert_perror: (libc)Consistency Checking.
* atan2: (libc)Inverse Trig Functions.
* atan2f: (libc)Inverse Trig Functions.
* atan2l: (libc)Inverse Trig Functions.
* atan: (libc)Inverse Trig Functions.
* atanf: (libc)Inverse Trig Functions.
* atanh: (libc)Hyperbolic Functions.
* atanhf: (libc)Hyperbolic Functions.
* atanhl: (libc)Hyperbolic Functions.
* atanl: (libc)Inverse Trig Functions.
* atexit: (libc)Cleanups on Exit.
* atof: (libc)Parsing of Floats.
* atoi: (libc)Parsing of Integers.
* atol: (libc)Parsing of Integers.
* atoll: (libc)Parsing of Integers.
* backtrace: (libc)Backtraces.
* backtrace_symbols: (libc)Backtraces.
* backtrace_symbols_fd: (libc)Backtraces.
* basename: (libc)Finding Tokens in a String.
* basename: (libc)Finding Tokens in a String.
* bcmp: (libc)String/Array Comparison.
* bcopy: (libc)Copying and Concatenation.
* bind: (libc)Setting Address.
* bind_textdomain_codeset: (libc)Charset conversion in gettext.
* bindtextdomain: (libc)Locating gettext catalog.
* brk: (libc)Resizing the Data Segment.
* bsearch: (libc)Array Search Function.
* btowc: (libc)Converting a Character.
* bzero: (libc)Copying and Concatenation.
* cabs: (libc)Absolute Value.
* cabsf: (libc)Absolute Value.
* cabsl: (libc)Absolute Value.
* cacos: (libc)Inverse Trig Functions.
* cacosf: (libc)Inverse Trig Functions.
* cacosh: (libc)Hyperbolic Functions.
* cacoshf: (libc)Hyperbolic Functions.
* cacoshl: (libc)Hyperbolic Functions.
* cacosl: (libc)Inverse Trig Functions.
* calloc: (libc)Allocating Cleared Space.
* canonicalize_file_name: (libc)Symbolic Links.
* carg: (libc)Operations on Complex.
* cargf: (libc)Operations on Complex.
* cargl: (libc)Operations on Complex.
* casin: (libc)Inverse Trig Functions.
* casinf: (libc)Inverse Trig Functions.
* casinh: (libc)Hyperbolic Functions.
* casinhf: (libc)Hyperbolic Functions.
* casinhl: (libc)Hyperbolic Functions.
* casinl: (libc)Inverse Trig Functions.
* catan: (libc)Inverse Trig Functions.
* catanf: (libc)Inverse Trig Functions.
* catanh: (libc)Hyperbolic Functions.
* catanhf: (libc)Hyperbolic Functions.
* catanhl: (libc)Hyperbolic Functions.
* catanl: (libc)Inverse Trig Functions.
* catclose: (libc)The catgets Functions.
* catgets: (libc)The catgets Functions.
* catopen: (libc)The catgets Functions.
* cbc_crypt: (libc)DES Encryption.
* cbrt: (libc)Exponents and Logarithms.
* cbrtf: (libc)Exponents and Logarithms.
* cbrtl: (libc)Exponents and Logarithms.
* ccos: (libc)Trig Functions.
* ccosf: (libc)Trig Functions.
* ccosh: (libc)Hyperbolic Functions.
* ccoshf: (libc)Hyperbolic Functions.
* ccoshl: (libc)Hyperbolic Functions.
* ccosl: (libc)Trig Functions.
* ceil: (libc)Rounding Functions.
* ceilf: (libc)Rounding Functions.
* ceill: (libc)Rounding Functions.
* cexp: (libc)Exponents and Logarithms.
* cexpf: (libc)Exponents and Logarithms.
* cexpl: (libc)Exponents and Logarithms.
* cfgetispeed: (libc)Line Speed.
* cfgetospeed: (libc)Line Speed.
* cfmakeraw: (libc)Noncanonical Input.
* cfree: (libc)Freeing after Malloc.
* cfsetispeed: (libc)Line Speed.
* cfsetospeed: (libc)Line Speed.
* cfsetspeed: (libc)Line Speed.
* chdir: (libc)Working Directory.
* chmod: (libc)Setting Permissions.
* chown: (libc)File Owner.
* cimag: (libc)Operations on Complex.
* cimagf: (libc)Operations on Complex.
* cimagl: (libc)Operations on Complex.
* clearenv: (libc)Environment Access.
* clearerr: (libc)Error Recovery.
* clearerr_unlocked: (libc)Error Recovery.
* clock: (libc)CPU Time.
* clog10: (libc)Exponents and Logarithms.
* clog10f: (libc)Exponents and Logarithms.
* clog10l: (libc)Exponents and Logarithms.
* clog: (libc)Exponents and Logarithms.
* clogf: (libc)Exponents and Logarithms.
* clogl: (libc)Exponents and Logarithms.
* close: (libc)Opening and Closing Files.
* closedir: (libc)Reading/Closing Directory.
* closelog: (libc)closelog.
* confstr: (libc)String Parameters.
* conj: (libc)Operations on Complex.
* conjf: (libc)Operations on Complex.
* conjl: (libc)Operations on Complex.
* connect: (libc)Connecting.
* copysign: (libc)FP Bit Twiddling.
* copysignf: (libc)FP Bit Twiddling.
* copysignl: (libc)FP Bit Twiddling.
* cos: (libc)Trig Functions.
* cosf: (libc)Trig Functions.
* cosh: (libc)Hyperbolic Functions.
* coshf: (libc)Hyperbolic Functions.
* coshl: (libc)Hyperbolic Functions.
* cosl: (libc)Trig Functions.
* cpow: (libc)Exponents and Logarithms.
* cpowf: (libc)Exponents and Logarithms.
* cpowl: (libc)Exponents and Logarithms.
* cproj: (libc)Operations on Complex.
* cprojf: (libc)Operations on Complex.
* cprojl: (libc)Operations on Complex.
* creal: (libc)Operations on Complex.
* crealf: (libc)Operations on Complex.
* creall: (libc)Operations on Complex.
* creat64: (libc)Opening and Closing Files.
* creat: (libc)Opening and Closing Files.
* crypt: (libc)crypt.
* crypt_r: (libc)crypt.
* csin: (libc)Trig Functions.
* csinf: (libc)Trig Functions.
* csinh: (libc)Hyperbolic Functions.
* csinhf: (libc)Hyperbolic Functions.
* csinhl: (libc)Hyperbolic Functions.
* csinl: (libc)Trig Functions.
* csqrt: (libc)Exponents and Logarithms.
* csqrtf: (libc)Exponents and Logarithms.
* csqrtl: (libc)Exponents and Logarithms.
* ctan: (libc)Trig Functions.
* ctanf: (libc)Trig Functions.
* ctanh: (libc)Hyperbolic Functions.
* ctanhf: (libc)Hyperbolic Functions.
* ctanhl: (libc)Hyperbolic Functions.
* ctanl: (libc)Trig Functions.
* ctermid: (libc)Identifying the Terminal.
* ctime: (libc)Formatting Calendar Time.
* ctime_r: (libc)Formatting Calendar Time.
* cuserid: (libc)Who Logged In.
* dcgettext: (libc)Translation with gettext.
* dcngettext: (libc)Advanced gettext functions.
* des_setparity: (libc)DES Encryption.
* dgettext: (libc)Translation with gettext.
* difftime: (libc)Elapsed Time.
* dirfd: (libc)Opening a Directory.
* dirname: (libc)Finding Tokens in a String.
* div: (libc)Integer Division.
* dngettext: (libc)Advanced gettext functions.
* drand48: (libc)SVID Random.
* drand48_r: (libc)SVID Random.
* drem: (libc)Remainder Functions.
* dremf: (libc)Remainder Functions.
* dreml: (libc)Remainder Functions.
* dup2: (libc)Duplicating Descriptors.
* dup: (libc)Duplicating Descriptors.
* ecb_crypt: (libc)DES Encryption.
* ecvt: (libc)System V Number Conversion.
* ecvt_r: (libc)System V Number Conversion.
* encrypt: (libc)DES Encryption.
* encrypt_r: (libc)DES Encryption.
* endfsent: (libc)fstab.
* endgrent: (libc)Scanning All Groups.
* endhostent: (libc)Host Names.
* endmntent: (libc)mtab.
* endnetent: (libc)Networks Database.
* endnetgrent: (libc)Lookup Netgroup.
* endprotoent: (libc)Protocols Database.
* endpwent: (libc)Scanning All Users.
* endservent: (libc)Services Database.
* endutent: (libc)Manipulating the Database.
* endutxent: (libc)XPG Functions.
* envz_add: (libc)Envz Functions.
* envz_entry: (libc)Envz Functions.
* envz_get: (libc)Envz Functions.
* envz_merge: (libc)Envz Functions.
* envz_strip: (libc)Envz Functions.
* erand48: (libc)SVID Random.
* erand48_r: (libc)SVID Random.
* erf: (libc)Special Functions.
* erfc: (libc)Special Functions.
* erfcf: (libc)Special Functions.
* erfcl: (libc)Special Functions.
* erff: (libc)Special Functions.
* erfl: (libc)Special Functions.
* err: (libc)Error Messages.
* errno: (libc)Checking for Errors.
* error: (libc)Error Messages.
* error_at_line: (libc)Error Messages.
* errx: (libc)Error Messages.
* execl: (libc)Executing a File.
* execle: (libc)Executing a File.
* execlp: (libc)Executing a File.
* execv: (libc)Executing a File.
* execve: (libc)Executing a File.
* execvp: (libc)Executing a File.
* exit: (libc)Normal Termination.
* exp10: (libc)Exponents and Logarithms.
* exp10f: (libc)Exponents and Logarithms.
* exp10l: (libc)Exponents and Logarithms.
* exp2: (libc)Exponents and Logarithms.
* exp2f: (libc)Exponents and Logarithms.
* exp2l: (libc)Exponents and Logarithms.
* exp: (libc)Exponents and Logarithms.
* expf: (libc)Exponents and Logarithms.
* expl: (libc)Exponents and Logarithms.
* expm1: (libc)Exponents and Logarithms.
* expm1f: (libc)Exponents and Logarithms.
* expm1l: (libc)Exponents and Logarithms.
* fabs: (libc)Absolute Value.
* fabsf: (libc)Absolute Value.
* fabsl: (libc)Absolute Value.
* fchdir: (libc)Working Directory.
* fchmod: (libc)Setting Permissions.
* fchown: (libc)File Owner.
* fclose: (libc)Closing Streams.
* fcloseall: (libc)Closing Streams.
* fcntl: (libc)Control Operations.
* fcvt: (libc)System V Number Conversion.
* fcvt_r: (libc)System V Number Conversion.
* fdatasync: (libc)Synchronizing I/O.
* fdim: (libc)Misc FP Arithmetic.
* fdimf: (libc)Misc FP Arithmetic.
* fdiml: (libc)Misc FP Arithmetic.
* fdopen: (libc)Descriptors and Streams.
* fdopendir: (libc)Opening a Directory.
* feclearexcept: (libc)Status bit operations.
* fedisableexcept: (libc)Control Functions.
* feenableexcept: (libc)Control Functions.
* fegetenv: (libc)Control Functions.
* fegetexcept: (libc)Control Functions.
* fegetexceptflag: (libc)Status bit operations.
* fegetround: (libc)Rounding.
* feholdexcept: (libc)Control Functions.
* feof: (libc)EOF and Errors.
* feof_unlocked: (libc)EOF and Errors.
* feraiseexcept: (libc)Status bit operations.
* ferror: (libc)EOF and Errors.
* ferror_unlocked: (libc)EOF and Errors.
* fesetenv: (libc)Control Functions.
* fesetexceptflag: (libc)Status bit operations.
* fesetround: (libc)Rounding.
* fetestexcept: (libc)Status bit operations.
* feupdateenv: (libc)Control Functions.
* fflush: (libc)Flushing Buffers.
* fflush_unlocked: (libc)Flushing Buffers.
* fgetc: (libc)Character Input.
* fgetc_unlocked: (libc)Character Input.
* fgetgrent: (libc)Scanning All Groups.
* fgetgrent_r: (libc)Scanning All Groups.
* fgetpos64: (libc)Portable Positioning.
* fgetpos: (libc)Portable Positioning.
* fgetpwent: (libc)Scanning All Users.
* fgetpwent_r: (libc)Scanning All Users.
* fgets: (libc)Line Input.
* fgets_unlocked: (libc)Line Input.
* fgetwc: (libc)Character Input.
* fgetwc_unlocked: (libc)Character Input.
* fgetws: (libc)Line Input.
* fgetws_unlocked: (libc)Line Input.
* fileno: (libc)Descriptors and Streams.
* fileno_unlocked: (libc)Descriptors and Streams.
* finite: (libc)Floating Point Classes.
* finitef: (libc)Floating Point Classes.
* finitel: (libc)Floating Point Classes.
* flockfile: (libc)Streams and Threads.
* floor: (libc)Rounding Functions.
* floorf: (libc)Rounding Functions.
* floorl: (libc)Rounding Functions.
* fma: (libc)Misc FP Arithmetic.
* fmaf: (libc)Misc FP Arithmetic.
* fmal: (libc)Misc FP Arithmetic.
* fmax: (libc)Misc FP Arithmetic.
* fmaxf: (libc)Misc FP Arithmetic.
* fmaxl: (libc)Misc FP Arithmetic.
* fmemopen: (libc)String Streams.
* fmin: (libc)Misc FP Arithmetic.
* fminf: (libc)Misc FP Arithmetic.
* fminl: (libc)Misc FP Arithmetic.
* fmod: (libc)Remainder Functions.
* fmodf: (libc)Remainder Functions.
* fmodl: (libc)Remainder Functions.
* fmtmsg: (libc)Printing Formatted Messages.
* fnmatch: (libc)Wildcard Matching.
* fopen64: (libc)Opening Streams.
* fopen: (libc)Opening Streams.
* fopencookie: (libc)Streams and Cookies.
* fork: (libc)Creating a Process.
* forkpty: (libc)Pseudo-Terminal Pairs.
* fpathconf: (libc)Pathconf.
* fpclassify: (libc)Floating Point Classes.
* fprintf: (libc)Formatted Output Functions.
* fputc: (libc)Simple Output.
* fputc_unlocked: (libc)Simple Output.
* fputs: (libc)Simple Output.
* fputs_unlocked: (libc)Simple Output.
* fputwc: (libc)Simple Output.
* fputwc_unlocked: (libc)Simple Output.
* fputws: (libc)Simple Output.
* fputws_unlocked: (libc)Simple Output.
* fread: (libc)Block Input/Output.
* fread_unlocked: (libc)Block Input/Output.
* free: (libc)Freeing after Malloc.
* freopen64: (libc)Opening Streams.
* freopen: (libc)Opening Streams.
* frexp: (libc)Normalization Functions.
* frexpf: (libc)Normalization Functions.
* frexpl: (libc)Normalization Functions.
* fscanf: (libc)Formatted Input Functions.
* fseek: (libc)File Positioning.
* fseeko64: (libc)File Positioning.
* fseeko: (libc)File Positioning.
* fsetpos64: (libc)Portable Positioning.
* fsetpos: (libc)Portable Positioning.
* fstat64: (libc)Reading Attributes.
* fstat: (libc)Reading Attributes.
* fsync: (libc)Synchronizing I/O.
* ftell: (libc)File Positioning.
* ftello64: (libc)File Positioning.
* ftello: (libc)File Positioning.
* ftruncate64: (libc)File Size.
* ftruncate: (libc)File Size.
* ftrylockfile: (libc)Streams and Threads.
* ftw64: (libc)Working with Directory Trees.
* ftw: (libc)Working with Directory Trees.
* funlockfile: (libc)Streams and Threads.
* futimes: (libc)File Times.
* fwide: (libc)Streams and I18N.
* fwprintf: (libc)Formatted Output Functions.
* fwrite: (libc)Block Input/Output.
* fwrite_unlocked: (libc)Block Input/Output.
* fwscanf: (libc)Formatted Input Functions.
* gamma: (libc)Special Functions.
* gammaf: (libc)Special Functions.
* gammal: (libc)Special Functions.
* gcvt: (libc)System V Number Conversion.
* get_avphys_pages: (libc)Query Memory Parameters.
* get_current_dir_name: (libc)Working Directory.
* get_nprocs: (libc)Processor Resources.
* get_nprocs_conf: (libc)Processor Resources.
* get_phys_pages: (libc)Query Memory Parameters.
* getauxval: (libc)Auxiliary Vector.
* getc: (libc)Character Input.
* getc_unlocked: (libc)Character Input.
* getchar: (libc)Character Input.
* getchar_unlocked: (libc)Character Input.
* getcontext: (libc)System V contexts.
* getcwd: (libc)Working Directory.
* getdate: (libc)General Time String Parsing.
* getdate_r: (libc)General Time String Parsing.
* getdelim: (libc)Line Input.
* getdomainnname: (libc)Host Identification.
* getegid: (libc)Reading Persona.
* getenv: (libc)Environment Access.
* geteuid: (libc)Reading Persona.
* getfsent: (libc)fstab.
* getfsfile: (libc)fstab.
* getfsspec: (libc)fstab.
* getgid: (libc)Reading Persona.
* getgrent: (libc)Scanning All Groups.
* getgrent_r: (libc)Scanning All Groups.
* getgrgid: (libc)Lookup Group.
* getgrgid_r: (libc)Lookup Group.
* getgrnam: (libc)Lookup Group.
* getgrnam_r: (libc)Lookup Group.
* getgrouplist: (libc)Setting Groups.
* getgroups: (libc)Reading Persona.
* gethostbyaddr: (libc)Host Names.
* gethostbyaddr_r: (libc)Host Names.
* gethostbyname2: (libc)Host Names.
* gethostbyname2_r: (libc)Host Names.
* gethostbyname: (libc)Host Names.
* gethostbyname_r: (libc)Host Names.
* gethostent: (libc)Host Names.
* gethostid: (libc)Host Identification.
* gethostname: (libc)Host Identification.
* getitimer: (libc)Setting an Alarm.
* getline: (libc)Line Input.
* getloadavg: (libc)Processor Resources.
* getlogin: (libc)Who Logged In.
* getmntent: (libc)mtab.
* getmntent_r: (libc)mtab.
* getnetbyaddr: (libc)Networks Database.
* getnetbyname: (libc)Networks Database.
* getnetent: (libc)Networks Database.
* getnetgrent: (libc)Lookup Netgroup.
* getnetgrent_r: (libc)Lookup Netgroup.
* getopt: (libc)Using Getopt.
* getopt_long: (libc)Getopt Long Options.
* getopt_long_only: (libc)Getopt Long Options.
* getpagesize: (libc)Query Memory Parameters.
* getpass: (libc)getpass.
* getpeername: (libc)Who is Connected.
* getpgid: (libc)Process Group Functions.
* getpgrp: (libc)Process Group Functions.
* getpid: (libc)Process Identification.
* getppid: (libc)Process Identification.
* getpriority: (libc)Traditional Scheduling Functions.
* getprotobyname: (libc)Protocols Database.
* getprotobynumber: (libc)Protocols Database.
* getprotoent: (libc)Protocols Database.
* getpt: (libc)Allocation.
* getpwent: (libc)Scanning All Users.
* getpwent_r: (libc)Scanning All Users.
* getpwnam: (libc)Lookup User.
* getpwnam_r: (libc)Lookup User.
* getpwuid: (libc)Lookup User.
* getpwuid_r: (libc)Lookup User.
* getrlimit64: (libc)Limits on Resources.
* getrlimit: (libc)Limits on Resources.
* getrusage: (libc)Resource Usage.
* gets: (libc)Line Input.
* getservbyname: (libc)Services Database.
* getservbyport: (libc)Services Database.
* getservent: (libc)Services Database.
* getsid: (libc)Process Group Functions.
* getsockname: (libc)Reading Address.
* getsockopt: (libc)Socket Option Functions.
* getsubopt: (libc)Suboptions.
* gettext: (libc)Translation with gettext.
* gettimeofday: (libc)High-Resolution Calendar.
* getuid: (libc)Reading Persona.
* getumask: (libc)Setting Permissions.
* getutent: (libc)Manipulating the Database.
* getutent_r: (libc)Manipulating the Database.
* getutid: (libc)Manipulating the Database.
* getutid_r: (libc)Manipulating the Database.
* getutline: (libc)Manipulating the Database.
* getutline_r: (libc)Manipulating the Database.
* getutmp: (libc)XPG Functions.
* getutmpx: (libc)XPG Functions.
* getutxent: (libc)XPG Functions.
* getutxid: (libc)XPG Functions.
* getutxline: (libc)XPG Functions.
* getw: (libc)Character Input.
* getwc: (libc)Character Input.
* getwc_unlocked: (libc)Character Input.
* getwchar: (libc)Character Input.
* getwchar_unlocked: (libc)Character Input.
* getwd: (libc)Working Directory.
* glob64: (libc)Calling Glob.
* glob: (libc)Calling Glob.
* globfree64: (libc)More Flags for Globbing.
* globfree: (libc)More Flags for Globbing.
* gmtime: (libc)Broken-down Time.
* gmtime_r: (libc)Broken-down Time.
* grantpt: (libc)Allocation.
* gsignal: (libc)Signaling Yourself.
* gtty: (libc)BSD Terminal Modes.
* hasmntopt: (libc)mtab.
* hcreate: (libc)Hash Search Function.
* hcreate_r: (libc)Hash Search Function.
* hdestroy: (libc)Hash Search Function.
* hdestroy_r: (libc)Hash Search Function.
* hsearch: (libc)Hash Search Function.
* hsearch_r: (libc)Hash Search Function.
* htonl: (libc)Byte Order.
* htons: (libc)Byte Order.
* hypot: (libc)Exponents and Logarithms.
* hypotf: (libc)Exponents and Logarithms.
* hypotl: (libc)Exponents and Logarithms.
* iconv: (libc)Generic Conversion Interface.
* iconv_close: (libc)Generic Conversion Interface.
* iconv_open: (libc)Generic Conversion Interface.
* if_freenameindex: (libc)Interface Naming.
* if_indextoname: (libc)Interface Naming.
* if_nameindex: (libc)Interface Naming.
* if_nametoindex: (libc)Interface Naming.
* ilogb: (libc)Exponents and Logarithms.
* ilogbf: (libc)Exponents and Logarithms.
* ilogbl: (libc)Exponents and Logarithms.
* imaxabs: (libc)Absolute Value.
* imaxdiv: (libc)Integer Division.
* in6addr_any: (libc)Host Address Data Type.
* in6addr_loopback: (libc)Host Address Data Type.
* index: (libc)Search Functions.
* inet_addr: (libc)Host Address Functions.
* inet_aton: (libc)Host Address Functions.
* inet_lnaof: (libc)Host Address Functions.
* inet_makeaddr: (libc)Host Address Functions.
* inet_netof: (libc)Host Address Functions.
* inet_network: (libc)Host Address Functions.
* inet_ntoa: (libc)Host Address Functions.
* inet_ntop: (libc)Host Address Functions.
* inet_pton: (libc)Host Address Functions.
* initgroups: (libc)Setting Groups.
* initstate: (libc)BSD Random.
* initstate_r: (libc)BSD Random.
* innetgr: (libc)Netgroup Membership.
* ioctl: (libc)IOCTLs.
* isalnum: (libc)Classification of Characters.
* isalpha: (libc)Classification of Characters.
* isascii: (libc)Classification of Characters.
* isatty: (libc)Is It a Terminal.
* isblank: (libc)Classification of Characters.
* iscntrl: (libc)Classification of Characters.
* isdigit: (libc)Classification of Characters.
* isfinite: (libc)Floating Point Classes.
* isgraph: (libc)Classification of Characters.
* isgreater: (libc)FP Comparison Functions.
* isgreaterequal: (libc)FP Comparison Functions.
* isinf: (libc)Floating Point Classes.
* isinff: (libc)Floating Point Classes.
* isinfl: (libc)Floating Point Classes.
* isless: (libc)FP Comparison Functions.
* islessequal: (libc)FP Comparison Functions.
* islessgreater: (libc)FP Comparison Functions.
* islower: (libc)Classification of Characters.
* isnan: (libc)Floating Point Classes.
* isnan: (libc)Floating Point Classes.
* isnanf: (libc)Floating Point Classes.
* isnanl: (libc)Floating Point Classes.
* isnormal: (libc)Floating Point Classes.
* isprint: (libc)Classification of Characters.
* ispunct: (libc)Classification of Characters.
* issignaling: (libc)Floating Point Classes.
* isspace: (libc)Classification of Characters.
* isunordered: (libc)FP Comparison Functions.
* isupper: (libc)Classification of Characters.
* iswalnum: (libc)Classification of Wide Characters.
* iswalpha: (libc)Classification of Wide Characters.
* iswblank: (libc)Classification of Wide Characters.
* iswcntrl: (libc)Classification of Wide Characters.
* iswctype: (libc)Classification of Wide Characters.
* iswdigit: (libc)Classification of Wide Characters.
* iswgraph: (libc)Classification of Wide Characters.
* iswlower: (libc)Classification of Wide Characters.
* iswprint: (libc)Classification of Wide Characters.
* iswpunct: (libc)Classification of Wide Characters.
* iswspace: (libc)Classification of Wide Characters.
* iswupper: (libc)Classification of Wide Characters.
* iswxdigit: (libc)Classification of Wide Characters.
* isxdigit: (libc)Classification of Characters.
* j0: (libc)Special Functions.
* j0f: (libc)Special Functions.
* j0l: (libc)Special Functions.
* j1: (libc)Special Functions.
* j1f: (libc)Special Functions.
* j1l: (libc)Special Functions.
* jn: (libc)Special Functions.
* jnf: (libc)Special Functions.
* jnl: (libc)Special Functions.
* jrand48: (libc)SVID Random.
* jrand48_r: (libc)SVID Random.
* kill: (libc)Signaling Another Process.
* killpg: (libc)Signaling Another Process.
* l64a: (libc)Encode Binary Data.
* labs: (libc)Absolute Value.
* lcong48: (libc)SVID Random.
* lcong48_r: (libc)SVID Random.
* ldexp: (libc)Normalization Functions.
* ldexpf: (libc)Normalization Functions.
* ldexpl: (libc)Normalization Functions.
* ldiv: (libc)Integer Division.
* lfind: (libc)Array Search Function.
* lgamma: (libc)Special Functions.
* lgamma_r: (libc)Special Functions.
* lgammaf: (libc)Special Functions.
* lgammaf_r: (libc)Special Functions.
* lgammal: (libc)Special Functions.
* lgammal_r: (libc)Special Functions.
* link: (libc)Hard Links.
* lio_listio64: (libc)Asynchronous Reads/Writes.
* lio_listio: (libc)Asynchronous Reads/Writes.
* listen: (libc)Listening.
* llabs: (libc)Absolute Value.
* lldiv: (libc)Integer Division.
* llrint: (libc)Rounding Functions.
* llrintf: (libc)Rounding Functions.
* llrintl: (libc)Rounding Functions.
* llround: (libc)Rounding Functions.
* llroundf: (libc)Rounding Functions.
* llroundl: (libc)Rounding Functions.
* localeconv: (libc)The Lame Way to Locale Data.
* localtime: (libc)Broken-down Time.
* localtime_r: (libc)Broken-down Time.
* log10: (libc)Exponents and Logarithms.
* log10f: (libc)Exponents and Logarithms.
* log10l: (libc)Exponents and Logarithms.
* log1p: (libc)Exponents and Logarithms.
* log1pf: (libc)Exponents and Logarithms.
* log1pl: (libc)Exponents and Logarithms.
* log2: (libc)Exponents and Logarithms.
* log2f: (libc)Exponents and Logarithms.
* log2l: (libc)Exponents and Logarithms.
* log: (libc)Exponents and Logarithms.
* logb: (libc)Exponents and Logarithms.
* logbf: (libc)Exponents and Logarithms.
* logbl: (libc)Exponents and Logarithms.
* logf: (libc)Exponents and Logarithms.
* login: (libc)Logging In and Out.
* login_tty: (libc)Logging In and Out.
* logl: (libc)Exponents and Logarithms.
* logout: (libc)Logging In and Out.
* logwtmp: (libc)Logging In and Out.
* longjmp: (libc)Non-Local Details.
* lrand48: (libc)SVID Random.
* lrand48_r: (libc)SVID Random.
* lrint: (libc)Rounding Functions.
* lrintf: (libc)Rounding Functions.
* lrintl: (libc)Rounding Functions.
* lround: (libc)Rounding Functions.
* lroundf: (libc)Rounding Functions.
* lroundl: (libc)Rounding Functions.
* lsearch: (libc)Array Search Function.
* lseek64: (libc)File Position Primitive.
* lseek: (libc)File Position Primitive.
* lstat64: (libc)Reading Attributes.
* lstat: (libc)Reading Attributes.
* lutimes: (libc)File Times.
* madvise: (libc)Memory-mapped I/O.
* makecontext: (libc)System V contexts.
* mallinfo: (libc)Statistics of Malloc.
* malloc: (libc)Basic Allocation.
* mallopt: (libc)Malloc Tunable Parameters.
* mblen: (libc)Non-reentrant Character Conversion.
* mbrlen: (libc)Converting a Character.
* mbrtowc: (libc)Converting a Character.
* mbsinit: (libc)Keeping the state.
* mbsnrtowcs: (libc)Converting Strings.
* mbsrtowcs: (libc)Converting Strings.
* mbstowcs: (libc)Non-reentrant String Conversion.
* mbtowc: (libc)Non-reentrant Character Conversion.
* mcheck: (libc)Heap Consistency Checking.
* memalign: (libc)Aligned Memory Blocks.
* memccpy: (libc)Copying and Concatenation.
* memchr: (libc)Search Functions.
* memcmp: (libc)String/Array Comparison.
* memcpy: (libc)Copying and Concatenation.
* memfrob: (libc)Trivial Encryption.
* memmem: (libc)Search Functions.
* memmove: (libc)Copying and Concatenation.
* mempcpy: (libc)Copying and Concatenation.
* memrchr: (libc)Search Functions.
* memset: (libc)Copying and Concatenation.
* mkdir: (libc)Creating Directories.
* mkdtemp: (libc)Temporary Files.
* mkfifo: (libc)FIFO Special Files.
* mknod: (libc)Making Special Files.
* mkstemp: (libc)Temporary Files.
* mktemp: (libc)Temporary Files.
* mktime: (libc)Broken-down Time.
* mlock: (libc)Page Lock Functions.
* mlockall: (libc)Page Lock Functions.
* mmap64: (libc)Memory-mapped I/O.
* mmap: (libc)Memory-mapped I/O.
* modf: (libc)Rounding Functions.
* modff: (libc)Rounding Functions.
* modfl: (libc)Rounding Functions.
* mount: (libc)Mount-Unmount-Remount.
* mprobe: (libc)Heap Consistency Checking.
* mrand48: (libc)SVID Random.
* mrand48_r: (libc)SVID Random.
* mremap: (libc)Memory-mapped I/O.
* msync: (libc)Memory-mapped I/O.
* mtrace: (libc)Tracing malloc.
* munlock: (libc)Page Lock Functions.
* munlockall: (libc)Page Lock Functions.
* munmap: (libc)Memory-mapped I/O.
* muntrace: (libc)Tracing malloc.
* nan: (libc)FP Bit Twiddling.
* nanf: (libc)FP Bit Twiddling.
* nanl: (libc)FP Bit Twiddling.
* nanosleep: (libc)Sleeping.
* nearbyint: (libc)Rounding Functions.
* nearbyintf: (libc)Rounding Functions.
* nearbyintl: (libc)Rounding Functions.
* nextafter: (libc)FP Bit Twiddling.
* nextafterf: (libc)FP Bit Twiddling.
* nextafterl: (libc)FP Bit Twiddling.
* nexttoward: (libc)FP Bit Twiddling.
* nexttowardf: (libc)FP Bit Twiddling.
* nexttowardl: (libc)FP Bit Twiddling.
* nftw64: (libc)Working with Directory Trees.
* nftw: (libc)Working with Directory Trees.
* ngettext: (libc)Advanced gettext functions.
* nice: (libc)Traditional Scheduling Functions.
* nl_langinfo: (libc)The Elegant and Fast Way.
* nrand48: (libc)SVID Random.
* nrand48_r: (libc)SVID Random.
* ntohl: (libc)Byte Order.
* ntohs: (libc)Byte Order.
* ntp_adjtime: (libc)High Accuracy Clock.
* ntp_gettime: (libc)High Accuracy Clock.
* obstack_1grow: (libc)Growing Objects.
* obstack_1grow_fast: (libc)Extra Fast Growing.
* obstack_alignment_mask: (libc)Obstacks Data Alignment.
* obstack_alloc: (libc)Allocation in an Obstack.
* obstack_base: (libc)Status of an Obstack.
* obstack_blank: (libc)Growing Objects.
* obstack_blank_fast: (libc)Extra Fast Growing.
* obstack_chunk_size: (libc)Obstack Chunks.
* obstack_copy0: (libc)Allocation in an Obstack.
* obstack_copy: (libc)Allocation in an Obstack.
* obstack_finish: (libc)Growing Objects.
* obstack_free: (libc)Freeing Obstack Objects.
* obstack_grow0: (libc)Growing Objects.
* obstack_grow: (libc)Growing Objects.
* obstack_init: (libc)Preparing for Obstacks.
* obstack_int_grow: (libc)Growing Objects.
* obstack_int_grow_fast: (libc)Extra Fast Growing.
* obstack_next_free: (libc)Status of an Obstack.
* obstack_object_size: (libc)Growing Objects.
* obstack_object_size: (libc)Status of an Obstack.
* obstack_printf: (libc)Dynamic Output.
* obstack_ptr_grow: (libc)Growing Objects.
* obstack_ptr_grow_fast: (libc)Extra Fast Growing.
* obstack_room: (libc)Extra Fast Growing.
* obstack_vprintf: (libc)Variable Arguments Output.
* offsetof: (libc)Structure Measurement.
* on_exit: (libc)Cleanups on Exit.
* open64: (libc)Opening and Closing Files.
* open: (libc)Opening and Closing Files.
* open_memstream: (libc)String Streams.
* opendir: (libc)Opening a Directory.
* openlog: (libc)openlog.
* openpty: (libc)Pseudo-Terminal Pairs.
* parse_printf_format: (libc)Parsing a Template String.
* pathconf: (libc)Pathconf.
* pause: (libc)Using Pause.
* pclose: (libc)Pipe to a Subprocess.
* perror: (libc)Error Messages.
* pipe: (libc)Creating a Pipe.
* popen: (libc)Pipe to a Subprocess.
* posix_memalign: (libc)Aligned Memory Blocks.
* pow10: (libc)Exponents and Logarithms.
* pow10f: (libc)Exponents and Logarithms.
* pow10l: (libc)Exponents and Logarithms.
* pow: (libc)Exponents and Logarithms.
* powf: (libc)Exponents and Logarithms.
* powl: (libc)Exponents and Logarithms.
* pread64: (libc)I/O Primitives.
* pread: (libc)I/O Primitives.
* printf: (libc)Formatted Output Functions.
* printf_size: (libc)Predefined Printf Handlers.
* printf_size_info: (libc)Predefined Printf Handlers.
* psignal: (libc)Signal Messages.
* pthread_getattr_default_np: (libc)Default Thread Attributes.
* pthread_getspecific: (libc)Thread-specific Data.
* pthread_key_create: (libc)Thread-specific Data.
* pthread_key_delete: (libc)Thread-specific Data.
* pthread_setattr_default_np: (libc)Default Thread Attributes.
* pthread_setspecific: (libc)Thread-specific Data.
* ptsname: (libc)Allocation.
* ptsname_r: (libc)Allocation.
* putc: (libc)Simple Output.
* putc_unlocked: (libc)Simple Output.
* putchar: (libc)Simple Output.
* putchar_unlocked: (libc)Simple Output.
* putenv: (libc)Environment Access.
* putpwent: (libc)Writing a User Entry.
* puts: (libc)Simple Output.
* pututline: (libc)Manipulating the Database.
* pututxline: (libc)XPG Functions.
* putw: (libc)Simple Output.
* putwc: (libc)Simple Output.
* putwc_unlocked: (libc)Simple Output.
* putwchar: (libc)Simple Output.
* putwchar_unlocked: (libc)Simple Output.
* pwrite64: (libc)I/O Primitives.
* pwrite: (libc)I/O Primitives.
* qecvt: (libc)System V Number Conversion.
* qecvt_r: (libc)System V Number Conversion.
* qfcvt: (libc)System V Number Conversion.
* qfcvt_r: (libc)System V Number Conversion.
* qgcvt: (libc)System V Number Conversion.
* qsort: (libc)Array Sort Function.
* raise: (libc)Signaling Yourself.
* rand: (libc)ISO Random.
* rand_r: (libc)ISO Random.
* random: (libc)BSD Random.
* random_r: (libc)BSD Random.
* rawmemchr: (libc)Search Functions.
* read: (libc)I/O Primitives.
* readdir64: (libc)Reading/Closing Directory.
* readdir64_r: (libc)Reading/Closing Directory.
* readdir: (libc)Reading/Closing Directory.
* readdir_r: (libc)Reading/Closing Directory.
* readlink: (libc)Symbolic Links.
* readv: (libc)Scatter-Gather.
* realloc: (libc)Changing Block Size.
* realpath: (libc)Symbolic Links.
* recv: (libc)Receiving Data.
* recvfrom: (libc)Receiving Datagrams.
* recvmsg: (libc)Receiving Datagrams.
* regcomp: (libc)POSIX Regexp Compilation.
* regerror: (libc)Regexp Cleanup.
* regexec: (libc)Matching POSIX Regexps.
* regfree: (libc)Regexp Cleanup.
* register_printf_function: (libc)Registering New Conversions.
* remainder: (libc)Remainder Functions.
* remainderf: (libc)Remainder Functions.
* remainderl: (libc)Remainder Functions.
* remove: (libc)Deleting Files.
* rename: (libc)Renaming Files.
* rewind: (libc)File Positioning.
* rewinddir: (libc)Random Access Directory.
* rindex: (libc)Search Functions.
* rint: (libc)Rounding Functions.
* rintf: (libc)Rounding Functions.
* rintl: (libc)Rounding Functions.
* rmdir: (libc)Deleting Files.
* round: (libc)Rounding Functions.
* roundf: (libc)Rounding Functions.
* roundl: (libc)Rounding Functions.
* rpmatch: (libc)Yes-or-No Questions.
* sbrk: (libc)Resizing the Data Segment.
* scalb: (libc)Normalization Functions.
* scalbf: (libc)Normalization Functions.
* scalbl: (libc)Normalization Functions.
* scalbln: (libc)Normalization Functions.
* scalblnf: (libc)Normalization Functions.
* scalblnl: (libc)Normalization Functions.
* scalbn: (libc)Normalization Functions.
* scalbnf: (libc)Normalization Functions.
* scalbnl: (libc)Normalization Functions.
* scandir64: (libc)Scanning Directory Content.
* scandir: (libc)Scanning Directory Content.
* scanf: (libc)Formatted Input Functions.
* sched_get_priority_max: (libc)Basic Scheduling Functions.
* sched_get_priority_min: (libc)Basic Scheduling Functions.
* sched_getaffinity: (libc)CPU Affinity.
* sched_getparam: (libc)Basic Scheduling Functions.
* sched_getscheduler: (libc)Basic Scheduling Functions.
* sched_rr_get_interval: (libc)Basic Scheduling Functions.
* sched_setaffinity: (libc)CPU Affinity.
* sched_setparam: (libc)Basic Scheduling Functions.
* sched_setscheduler: (libc)Basic Scheduling Functions.
* sched_yield: (libc)Basic Scheduling Functions.
* secure_getenv: (libc)Environment Access.
* seed48: (libc)SVID Random.
* seed48_r: (libc)SVID Random.
* seekdir: (libc)Random Access Directory.
* select: (libc)Waiting for I/O.
* send: (libc)Sending Data.
* sendmsg: (libc)Receiving Datagrams.
* sendto: (libc)Sending Datagrams.
* setbuf: (libc)Controlling Buffering.
* setbuffer: (libc)Controlling Buffering.
* setcontext: (libc)System V contexts.
* setdomainname: (libc)Host Identification.
* setegid: (libc)Setting Groups.
* setenv: (libc)Environment Access.
* seteuid: (libc)Setting User ID.
* setfsent: (libc)fstab.
* setgid: (libc)Setting Groups.
* setgrent: (libc)Scanning All Groups.
* setgroups: (libc)Setting Groups.
* sethostent: (libc)Host Names.
* sethostid: (libc)Host Identification.
* sethostname: (libc)Host Identification.
* setitimer: (libc)Setting an Alarm.
* setjmp: (libc)Non-Local Details.
* setkey: (libc)DES Encryption.
* setkey_r: (libc)DES Encryption.
* setlinebuf: (libc)Controlling Buffering.
* setlocale: (libc)Setting the Locale.
* setlogmask: (libc)setlogmask.
* setmntent: (libc)mtab.
* setnetent: (libc)Networks Database.
* setnetgrent: (libc)Lookup Netgroup.
* setpgid: (libc)Process Group Functions.
* setpgrp: (libc)Process Group Functions.
* setpriority: (libc)Traditional Scheduling Functions.
* setprotoent: (libc)Protocols Database.
* setpwent: (libc)Scanning All Users.
* setregid: (libc)Setting Groups.
* setreuid: (libc)Setting User ID.
* setrlimit64: (libc)Limits on Resources.
* setrlimit: (libc)Limits on Resources.
* setservent: (libc)Services Database.
* setsid: (libc)Process Group Functions.
* setsockopt: (libc)Socket Option Functions.
* setstate: (libc)BSD Random.
* setstate_r: (libc)BSD Random.
* settimeofday: (libc)High-Resolution Calendar.
* setuid: (libc)Setting User ID.
* setutent: (libc)Manipulating the Database.
* setutxent: (libc)XPG Functions.
* setvbuf: (libc)Controlling Buffering.
* shm_open: (libc)Memory-mapped I/O.
* shm_unlink: (libc)Memory-mapped I/O.
* shutdown: (libc)Closing a Socket.
* sigaction: (libc)Advanced Signal Handling.
* sigaddset: (libc)Signal Sets.
* sigaltstack: (libc)Signal Stack.
* sigblock: (libc)Blocking in BSD.
* sigdelset: (libc)Signal Sets.
* sigemptyset: (libc)Signal Sets.
* sigfillset: (libc)Signal Sets.
* siginterrupt: (libc)BSD Handler.
* sigismember: (libc)Signal Sets.
* siglongjmp: (libc)Non-Local Exits and Signals.
* sigmask: (libc)Blocking in BSD.
* signal: (libc)Basic Signal Handling.
* signbit: (libc)FP Bit Twiddling.
* significand: (libc)Normalization Functions.
* significandf: (libc)Normalization Functions.
* significandl: (libc)Normalization Functions.
* sigpause: (libc)Blocking in BSD.
* sigpending: (libc)Checking for Pending Signals.
* sigprocmask: (libc)Process Signal Mask.
* sigsetjmp: (libc)Non-Local Exits and Signals.
* sigsetmask: (libc)Blocking in BSD.
* sigstack: (libc)Signal Stack.
* sigsuspend: (libc)Sigsuspend.
* sigvec: (libc)BSD Handler.
* sin: (libc)Trig Functions.
* sincos: (libc)Trig Functions.
* sincosf: (libc)Trig Functions.
* sincosl: (libc)Trig Functions.
* sinf: (libc)Trig Functions.
* sinh: (libc)Hyperbolic Functions.
* sinhf: (libc)Hyperbolic Functions.
* sinhl: (libc)Hyperbolic Functions.
* sinl: (libc)Trig Functions.
* sleep: (libc)Sleeping.
* snprintf: (libc)Formatted Output Functions.
* socket: (libc)Creating a Socket.
* socketpair: (libc)Socket Pairs.
* sprintf: (libc)Formatted Output Functions.
* sqrt: (libc)Exponents and Logarithms.
* sqrtf: (libc)Exponents and Logarithms.
* sqrtl: (libc)Exponents and Logarithms.
* srand48: (libc)SVID Random.
* srand48_r: (libc)SVID Random.
* srand: (libc)ISO Random.
* srandom: (libc)BSD Random.
* srandom_r: (libc)BSD Random.
* sscanf: (libc)Formatted Input Functions.
* ssignal: (libc)Basic Signal Handling.
* stat64: (libc)Reading Attributes.
* stat: (libc)Reading Attributes.
* stime: (libc)Simple Calendar Time.
* stpcpy: (libc)Copying and Concatenation.
* stpncpy: (libc)Copying and Concatenation.
* strcasecmp: (libc)String/Array Comparison.
* strcasestr: (libc)Search Functions.
* strcat: (libc)Copying and Concatenation.
* strchr: (libc)Search Functions.
* strchrnul: (libc)Search Functions.
* strcmp: (libc)String/Array Comparison.
* strcoll: (libc)Collation Functions.
* strcpy: (libc)Copying and Concatenation.
* strcspn: (libc)Search Functions.
* strdup: (libc)Copying and Concatenation.
* strdupa: (libc)Copying and Concatenation.
* strerror: (libc)Error Messages.
* strerror_r: (libc)Error Messages.
* strfmon: (libc)Formatting Numbers.
* strfry: (libc)strfry.
* strftime: (libc)Formatting Calendar Time.
* strlen: (libc)String Length.
* strncasecmp: (libc)String/Array Comparison.
* strncat: (libc)Copying and Concatenation.
* strncmp: (libc)String/Array Comparison.
* strncpy: (libc)Copying and Concatenation.
* strndup: (libc)Copying and Concatenation.
* strndupa: (libc)Copying and Concatenation.
* strnlen: (libc)String Length.
* strpbrk: (libc)Search Functions.
* strptime: (libc)Low-Level Time String Parsing.
* strrchr: (libc)Search Functions.
* strsep: (libc)Finding Tokens in a String.
* strsignal: (libc)Signal Messages.
* strspn: (libc)Search Functions.
* strstr: (libc)Search Functions.
* strtod: (libc)Parsing of Floats.
* strtof: (libc)Parsing of Floats.
* strtoimax: (libc)Parsing of Integers.
* strtok: (libc)Finding Tokens in a String.
* strtok_r: (libc)Finding Tokens in a String.
* strtol: (libc)Parsing of Integers.
* strtold: (libc)Parsing of Floats.
* strtoll: (libc)Parsing of Integers.
* strtoq: (libc)Parsing of Integers.
* strtoul: (libc)Parsing of Integers.
* strtoull: (libc)Parsing of Integers.
* strtoumax: (libc)Parsing of Integers.
* strtouq: (libc)Parsing of Integers.
* strverscmp: (libc)String/Array Comparison.
* strxfrm: (libc)Collation Functions.
* stty: (libc)BSD Terminal Modes.
* swapcontext: (libc)System V contexts.
* swprintf: (libc)Formatted Output Functions.
* swscanf: (libc)Formatted Input Functions.
* symlink: (libc)Symbolic Links.
* sync: (libc)Synchronizing I/O.
* syscall: (libc)System Calls.
* sysconf: (libc)Sysconf Definition.
* sysctl: (libc)System Parameters.
* syslog: (libc)syslog; vsyslog.
* system: (libc)Running a Command.
* sysv_signal: (libc)Basic Signal Handling.
* tan: (libc)Trig Functions.
* tanf: (libc)Trig Functions.
* tanh: (libc)Hyperbolic Functions.
* tanhf: (libc)Hyperbolic Functions.
* tanhl: (libc)Hyperbolic Functions.
* tanl: (libc)Trig Functions.
* tcdrain: (libc)Line Control.
* tcflow: (libc)Line Control.
* tcflush: (libc)Line Control.
* tcgetattr: (libc)Mode Functions.
* tcgetpgrp: (libc)Terminal Access Functions.
* tcgetsid: (libc)Terminal Access Functions.
* tcsendbreak: (libc)Line Control.
* tcsetattr: (libc)Mode Functions.
* tcsetpgrp: (libc)Terminal Access Functions.
* tdelete: (libc)Tree Search Function.
* tdestroy: (libc)Tree Search Function.
* telldir: (libc)Random Access Directory.
* tempnam: (libc)Temporary Files.
* textdomain: (libc)Locating gettext catalog.
* tfind: (libc)Tree Search Function.
* tgamma: (libc)Special Functions.
* tgammaf: (libc)Special Functions.
* tgammal: (libc)Special Functions.
* time: (libc)Simple Calendar Time.
* timegm: (libc)Broken-down Time.
* timelocal: (libc)Broken-down Time.
* times: (libc)Processor Time.
* tmpfile64: (libc)Temporary Files.
* tmpfile: (libc)Temporary Files.
* tmpnam: (libc)Temporary Files.
* tmpnam_r: (libc)Temporary Files.
* toascii: (libc)Case Conversion.
* tolower: (libc)Case Conversion.
* toupper: (libc)Case Conversion.
* towctrans: (libc)Wide Character Case Conversion.
* towlower: (libc)Wide Character Case Conversion.
* towupper: (libc)Wide Character Case Conversion.
* trunc: (libc)Rounding Functions.
* truncate64: (libc)File Size.
* truncate: (libc)File Size.
* truncf: (libc)Rounding Functions.
* truncl: (libc)Rounding Functions.
* tsearch: (libc)Tree Search Function.
* ttyname: (libc)Is It a Terminal.
* ttyname_r: (libc)Is It a Terminal.
* twalk: (libc)Tree Search Function.
* tzset: (libc)Time Zone Functions.
* ulimit: (libc)Limits on Resources.
* umask: (libc)Setting Permissions.
* umount2: (libc)Mount-Unmount-Remount.
* umount: (libc)Mount-Unmount-Remount.
* uname: (libc)Platform Type.
* ungetc: (libc)How Unread.
* ungetwc: (libc)How Unread.
* unlink: (libc)Deleting Files.
* unlockpt: (libc)Allocation.
* unsetenv: (libc)Environment Access.
* updwtmp: (libc)Manipulating the Database.
* utime: (libc)File Times.
* utimes: (libc)File Times.
* utmpname: (libc)Manipulating the Database.
* utmpxname: (libc)XPG Functions.
* va_arg: (libc)Argument Macros.
* va_copy: (libc)Argument Macros.
* va_end: (libc)Argument Macros.
* va_start: (libc)Argument Macros.
* valloc: (libc)Aligned Memory Blocks.
* vasprintf: (libc)Variable Arguments Output.
* verr: (libc)Error Messages.
* verrx: (libc)Error Messages.
* versionsort64: (libc)Scanning Directory Content.
* versionsort: (libc)Scanning Directory Content.
* vfork: (libc)Creating a Process.
* vfprintf: (libc)Variable Arguments Output.
* vfscanf: (libc)Variable Arguments Input.
* vfwprintf: (libc)Variable Arguments Output.
* vfwscanf: (libc)Variable Arguments Input.
* vlimit: (libc)Limits on Resources.
* vprintf: (libc)Variable Arguments Output.
* vscanf: (libc)Variable Arguments Input.
* vsnprintf: (libc)Variable Arguments Output.
* vsprintf: (libc)Variable Arguments Output.
* vsscanf: (libc)Variable Arguments Input.
* vswprintf: (libc)Variable Arguments Output.
* vswscanf: (libc)Variable Arguments Input.
* vsyslog: (libc)syslog; vsyslog.
* vtimes: (libc)Resource Usage.
* vwarn: (libc)Error Messages.
* vwarnx: (libc)Error Messages.
* vwprintf: (libc)Variable Arguments Output.
* vwscanf: (libc)Variable Arguments Input.
* wait3: (libc)BSD Wait Functions.
* wait4: (libc)Process Completion.
* wait: (libc)Process Completion.
* waitpid: (libc)Process Completion.
* warn: (libc)Error Messages.
* warnx: (libc)Error Messages.
* wcpcpy: (libc)Copying and Concatenation.
* wcpncpy: (libc)Copying and Concatenation.
* wcrtomb: (libc)Converting a Character.
* wcscasecmp: (libc)String/Array Comparison.
* wcscat: (libc)Copying and Concatenation.
* wcschr: (libc)Search Functions.
* wcschrnul: (libc)Search Functions.
* wcscmp: (libc)String/Array Comparison.
* wcscoll: (libc)Collation Functions.
* wcscpy: (libc)Copying and Concatenation.
* wcscspn: (libc)Search Functions.
* wcsdup: (libc)Copying and Concatenation.
* wcsftime: (libc)Formatting Calendar Time.
* wcslen: (libc)String Length.
* wcsncasecmp: (libc)String/Array Comparison.
* wcsncat: (libc)Copying and Concatenation.
* wcsncmp: (libc)String/Array Comparison.
* wcsncpy: (libc)Copying and Concatenation.
* wcsnlen: (libc)String Length.
* wcsnrtombs: (libc)Converting Strings.
* wcspbrk: (libc)Search Functions.
* wcsrchr: (libc)Search Functions.
* wcsrtombs: (libc)Converting Strings.
* wcsspn: (libc)Search Functions.
* wcsstr: (libc)Search Functions.
* wcstod: (libc)Parsing of Floats.
* wcstof: (libc)Parsing of Floats.
* wcstoimax: (libc)Parsing of Integers.
* wcstok: (libc)Finding Tokens in a String.
* wcstol: (libc)Parsing of Integers.
* wcstold: (libc)Parsing of Floats.
* wcstoll: (libc)Parsing of Integers.
* wcstombs: (libc)Non-reentrant String Conversion.
* wcstoq: (libc)Parsing of Integers.
* wcstoul: (libc)Parsing of Integers.
* wcstoull: (libc)Parsing of Integers.
* wcstoumax: (libc)Parsing of Integers.
* wcstouq: (libc)Parsing of Integers.
* wcswcs: (libc)Search Functions.
* wcsxfrm: (libc)Collation Functions.
* wctob: (libc)Converting a Character.
* wctomb: (libc)Non-reentrant Character Conversion.
* wctrans: (libc)Wide Character Case Conversion.
* wctype: (libc)Classification of Wide Characters.
* wmemchr: (libc)Search Functions.
* wmemcmp: (libc)String/Array Comparison.
* wmemcpy: (libc)Copying and Concatenation.
* wmemmove: (libc)Copying and Concatenation.
* wmempcpy: (libc)Copying and Concatenation.
* wmemset: (libc)Copying and Concatenation.
* wordexp: (libc)Calling Wordexp.
* wordfree: (libc)Calling Wordexp.
* wprintf: (libc)Formatted Output Functions.
* write: (libc)I/O Primitives.
* writev: (libc)Scatter-Gather.
* wscanf: (libc)Formatted Input Functions.
* y0: (libc)Special Functions.
* y0f: (libc)Special Functions.
* y0l: (libc)Special Functions.
* y1: (libc)Special Functions.
* y1f: (libc)Special Functions.
* y1l: (libc)Special Functions.
* yn: (libc)Special Functions.
* ynf: (libc)Special Functions.
* ynl: (libc)Special Functions.
END-INFO-DIR-ENTRY

   This file documents the GNU C Library.

   This is `The GNU C Library Reference Manual', for version 2.19
(Buildroot).

   Copyright (C) 1993-2014 Free Software Foundation, Inc.

   Permission is granted to copy, distribute and/or modify this document
under the terms of the GNU Free Documentation License, Version
1.3 or any later version published by the Free Software Foundation;
with the Invariant Sections being "Free Software Needs Free
Documentation" and "GNU Lesser General Public License", the Front-Cover
texts being "A GNU Manual", and with the Back-Cover Texts as in (a)
below.  A copy of the license is included in the section entitled "GNU
Free Documentation License".

   (a) The FSF's Back-Cover Text is: "You have the freedom to copy and
modify this GNU manual.  Buying copies from the FSF supports it in
developing GNU and promoting software freedom."


File: libc.info,  Node: Getopt Long Option Example,  Prev: Getopt Long Options,  Up: Getopt

25.2.4 Example of Parsing Long Options with `getopt_long'
---------------------------------------------------------


     #include <stdio.h>
     #include <stdlib.h>
     #include <getopt.h>

     /* Flag set by `--verbose'. */
     static int verbose_flag;

     int
     main (int argc, char **argv)
     {
       int c;

       while (1)
         {
           static struct option long_options[] =
             {
               /* These options set a flag. */
               {"verbose", no_argument,       &verbose_flag, 1},
               {"brief",   no_argument,       &verbose_flag, 0},
               /* These options don't set a flag.
                  We distinguish them by their indices. */
               {"add",     no_argument,       0, 'a'},
               {"append",  no_argument,       0, 'b'},
               {"delete",  required_argument, 0, 'd'},
               {"create",  required_argument, 0, 'c'},
               {"file",    required_argument, 0, 'f'},
               {0, 0, 0, 0}
             };
           /* `getopt_long' stores the option index here. */
           int option_index = 0;

           c = getopt_long (argc, argv, "abc:d:f:",
                            long_options, &option_index);

           /* Detect the end of the options. */
           if (c == -1)
             break;

           switch (c)
             {
             case 0:
               /* If this option set a flag, do nothing else now. */
               if (long_options[option_index].flag != 0)
                 break;
               printf ("option %s", long_options[option_index].name);
               if (optarg)
                 printf (" with arg %s", optarg);
               printf ("\n");
               break;

             case 'a':
               puts ("option -a\n");
               break;

             case 'b':
               puts ("option -b\n");
               break;

             case 'c':
               printf ("option -c with value `%s'\n", optarg);
               break;

             case 'd':
               printf ("option -d with value `%s'\n", optarg);
               break;

             case 'f':
               printf ("option -f with value `%s'\n", optarg);
               break;

             case '?':
               /* `getopt_long' already printed an error message. */
               break;

             default:
               abort ();
             }
         }

       /* Instead of reporting `--verbose'
          and `--brief' as they are encountered,
          we report the final status resulting from them. */
       if (verbose_flag)
         puts ("verbose flag is set");

       /* Print any remaining command line arguments (not options). */
       if (optind < argc)
         {
           printf ("non-option ARGV-elements: ");
           while (optind < argc)
             printf ("%s ", argv[optind++]);
           putchar ('\n');
         }

       exit (0);
     }


File: libc.info,  Node: Argp,  Next: Suboptions,  Prev: Getopt,  Up: Parsing Program Arguments

25.3 Parsing Program Options with Argp
======================================

"Argp" is an interface for parsing unix-style argument vectors.  *Note
Program Arguments::.

   Argp provides features unavailable in the more commonly used
`getopt' interface.  These features include automatically producing
output in response to the `--help' and `--version' options, as
described in the GNU coding standards.  Using argp makes it less likely
that programmers will neglect to implement these additional options or
keep them up to date.

   Argp also provides the ability to merge several independently defined
option parsers into one, mediating conflicts between them and making the
result appear seamless.  A library can export an argp option parser that
user programs might employ in conjunction with their own option parsers,
resulting in less work for the user programs.  Some programs may use
only argument parsers exported by libraries, thereby achieving
consistent and efficient option-parsing for abstractions implemented by
the libraries.

   The header file `<argp.h>' should be included to use argp.

25.3.1 The `argp_parse' Function
--------------------------------

The main interface to argp is the `argp_parse' function.  In many
cases, calling `argp_parse' is the only argument-parsing code needed in
`main'.  *Note Program Arguments::.

 -- Function: error_t argp_parse (const struct argp *ARGP, int ARGC,
          char **ARGV, unsigned FLAGS, int *ARG_INDEX, void *INPUT)
     Preliminary: | MT-Unsafe race:argpbuf locale env | AS-Unsafe heap
     i18n lock corrupt | AC-Unsafe mem lock corrupt | *Note POSIX
     Safety Concepts::.

     The `argp_parse' function parses the arguments in ARGV, of length
     ARGC, using the argp parser ARGP.  *Note Argp Parsers::.  Passing
     a null pointer for ARGP is the same as using a `struct argp'
     containing all zeros.

     FLAGS is a set of flag bits that modify the parsing behavior.
     *Note Argp Flags::.  INPUT is passed through to the argp parser
     ARGP, and has meaning defined by ARGP.  A typical usage is to pass
     a pointer to a structure which is used for specifying parameters
     to the parser and passing back the results.

     Unless the `ARGP_NO_EXIT' or `ARGP_NO_HELP' flags are included in
     FLAGS, calling `argp_parse' may result in the program exiting.
     This behavior is true if an error is detected, or when an unknown
     option is encountered.  *Note Program Termination::.

     If ARG_INDEX is non-null, the index of the first unparsed option
     in ARGV is returned as a value.

     The return value is zero for successful parsing, or an error code
     (*note Error Codes::) if an error is detected.  Different argp
     parsers may return arbitrary error codes, but the standard error
     codes are: `ENOMEM' if a memory allocation error occurred, or
     `EINVAL' if an unknown option or option argument is encountered.

* Menu:

* Globals: Argp Global Variables.  Global argp parameters.
* Parsers: Argp Parsers.        Defining parsers for use with `argp_parse'.
* Flags: Argp Flags.            Flags that modify the behavior of `argp_parse'.
* Help: Argp Help.              Printing help messages when not parsing.
* Examples: Argp Examples.      Simple examples of programs using argp.
* Customization: Argp User Customization.
                                Users may control the `--help' output format.


File: libc.info,  Node: Argp Global Variables,  Next: Argp Parsers,  Up: Argp

25.3.2 Argp Global Variables
----------------------------

These variables make it easy for user programs to implement the
`--version' option and provide a bug-reporting address in the `--help'
output.  These are implemented in argp by default.

 -- Variable: const char * argp_program_version
     If defined or set by the user program to a non-zero value, then a
     `--version' option is added when parsing with `argp_parse', which
     will print the `--version' string followed by a newline and exit.
     The exception to this is if the `ARGP_NO_EXIT' flag is used.

 -- Variable: const char * argp_program_bug_address
     If defined or set by the user program to a non-zero value,
     `argp_program_bug_address' should point to a string that will be
     printed at the end of the standard output for the `--help' option,
     embedded in a sentence that says `Report bugs to ADDRESS.'.

 -- Variable: argp_program_version_hook
     If defined or set by the user program to a non-zero value, a
     `--version' option is added when parsing with `arg_parse', which
     prints the program version and exits with a status of zero.  This
     is not the case if the `ARGP_NO_HELP' flag is used.  If the
     `ARGP_NO_EXIT' flag is set, the exit behavior of the program is
     suppressed or modified, as when the argp parser is going to be
     used by other programs.

     It should point to a function with this type of signature:

          void PRINT-VERSION (FILE *STREAM, struct argp_state *STATE)

     *Note Argp Parsing State::, for an explanation of STATE.

     This variable takes precedence over `argp_program_version', and is
     useful if a program has version information not easily expressed
     in a simple string.

 -- Variable: error_t argp_err_exit_status
     This is the exit status used when argp exits due to a parsing
     error.  If not defined or set by the user program, this defaults
     to: `EX_USAGE' from `<sysexits.h>'.


File: libc.info,  Node: Argp Parsers,  Next: Argp Flags,  Prev: Argp Global Variables,  Up: Argp

25.3.3 Specifying Argp Parsers
------------------------------

The first argument to the `argp_parse' function is a pointer to a
`struct argp', which is known as an "argp parser":

 -- Data Type: struct argp
     This structure specifies how to parse a given set of options and
     arguments, perhaps in conjunction with other argp parsers.  It has
     the following fields:

    `const struct argp_option *options'
          A pointer to a vector of `argp_option' structures specifying
          which options this argp parser understands; it may be zero if
          there are no options at all.  *Note Argp Option Vectors::.

    `argp_parser_t parser'
          A pointer to a function that defines actions for this parser;
          it is called for each option parsed, and at other
          well-defined points in the parsing process.  A value of zero
          is the same as a pointer to a function that always returns
          `ARGP_ERR_UNKNOWN'.  *Note Argp Parser Functions::.

    `const char *args_doc'
          If non-zero, a string describing what non-option arguments
          are called by this parser.  This is only used to print the
          `Usage:' message.  If it contains newlines, the strings
          separated by them are considered alternative usage patterns
          and printed on separate lines.  Lines after the first are
          prefixed by ` or: ' instead of `Usage:'.

    `const char *doc'
          If non-zero, a string containing extra text to be printed
          before and after the options in a long help message, with the
          two sections separated by a vertical tab (`'\v'', `'\013'')
          character.  By convention, the documentation before the
          options is just a short string explaining what the program
          does.  Documentation printed after the options describe
          behavior in more detail.

    `const struct argp_child *children'
          A pointer to a vector of `argp_children' structures.  This
          pointer specifies which additional argp parsers should be
          combined with this one.  *Note Argp Children::.

    `char *(*help_filter)(int KEY, const char *TEXT, void *INPUT)'
          If non-zero, a pointer to a function that filters the output
          of help messages.  *Note Argp Help Filtering::.

    `const char *argp_domain'
          If non-zero, the strings used in the argp library are
          translated using the domain described by this string.  If
          zero, the current default domain is used.


   Of the above group, `options', `parser', `args_doc', and the `doc'
fields are usually all that are needed.  If an argp parser is defined
as an initialized C variable, only the fields used need be specified in
the initializer.  The rest will default to zero due to the way C
structure initialization works.  This design is exploited in most argp
structures; the most-used fields are grouped near the beginning, the
unused fields left unspecified.

* Menu:

* Options: Argp Option Vectors.   Specifying options in an argp parser.
* Argp Parser Functions::         Defining actions for an argp parser.
* Children: Argp Children.        Combining multiple argp parsers.
* Help Filtering: Argp Help Filtering.  Customizing help output for an argp parser.


File: libc.info,  Node: Argp Option Vectors,  Next: Argp Parser Functions,  Prev: Argp Parsers,  Up: Argp Parsers

25.3.4 Specifying Options in an Argp Parser
-------------------------------------------

The `options' field in a `struct argp' points to a vector of `struct
argp_option' structures, each of which specifies an option that the
argp parser supports.  Multiple entries may be used for a single option
provided it has multiple names.  This should be terminated by an entry
with zero in all fields.  Note that when using an initialized C array
for options, writing `{ 0 }' is enough to achieve this.

 -- Data Type: struct argp_option
     This structure specifies a single option that an argp parser
     understands, as well as how to parse and document that option.  It
     has the following fields:

    `const char *name'
          The long name for this option, corresponding to the long
          option `--NAME'; this field may be zero if this option _only_
          has a short name.  To specify multiple names for an option,
          additional entries may follow this one, with the
          `OPTION_ALIAS' flag set.  *Note Argp Option Flags::.

    `int key'
          The integer key provided by the current option to the option
          parser.  If KEY has a value that is a printable ASCII
          character (i.e., `isascii (KEY)' is true), it _also_
          specifies a short option `-CHAR', where CHAR is the ASCII
          character with the code KEY.

    `const char *arg'
          If non-zero, this is the name of an argument associated with
          this option, which must be provided (e.g., with the
          `--NAME=VALUE' or `-CHAR VALUE' syntaxes), unless the
          `OPTION_ARG_OPTIONAL' flag (*note Argp Option Flags::) is
          set, in which case it _may_ be provided.

    `int flags'
          Flags associated with this option, some of which are referred
          to above.  *Note Argp Option Flags::.

    `const char *doc'
          A documentation string for this option, for printing in help
          messages.

          If both the `name' and `key' fields are zero, this string
          will be printed tabbed left from the normal option column,
          making it useful as a group header.  This will be the first
          thing printed in its group.  In this usage, it's conventional
          to end the string with a `:' character.

    `int group'
          Group identity for this option.

          In a long help message, options are sorted alphabetically
          within each group, and the groups presented in the order 0,
          1, 2, ..., N, -M, ..., -2, -1.

          Every entry in an options array with this field 0 will
          inherit the group number of the previous entry, or zero if
          it's the first one.  If it's a group header with `name' and
          `key' fields both zero, the previous entry + 1 is the
          default.  Automagic options such as `--help' are put into
          group -1.

          Note that because of C structure initialization rules, this
          field often need not be specified, because 0 is the correct
          value.

* Menu:

* Flags: Argp Option Flags.     Flags for options.


File: libc.info,  Node: Argp Option Flags,  Up: Argp Option Vectors

25.3.4.1 Flags for Argp Options
...............................

The following flags may be or'd together in the `flags' field of a
`struct argp_option'.  These flags control various aspects of how that
option is parsed or displayed in help messages:

`OPTION_ARG_OPTIONAL'
     The argument associated with this option is optional.

`OPTION_HIDDEN'
     This option isn't displayed in any help messages.

`OPTION_ALIAS'
     This option is an alias for the closest previous non-alias option.
     This means that it will be displayed in the same help entry, and
     will inherit fields other than `name' and `key' from the option
     being aliased.

`OPTION_DOC'
     This option isn't actually an option and should be ignored by the
     actual option parser.  It is an arbitrary section of documentation
     that should be displayed in much the same manner as the options.
     This is known as a "documentation option".

     If this flag is set, then the option `name' field is displayed
     unmodified (e.g., no `--' prefix is added) at the left-margin where
     a _short_ option would normally be displayed, and this
     documentation string is left in it's usual place.  For purposes of
     sorting, any leading whitespace and punctuation is ignored, unless
     the first non-whitespace character is `-'.  This entry is displayed
     after all options, after `OPTION_DOC' entries with a leading `-',
     in the same group.

`OPTION_NO_USAGE'
     This option shouldn't be included in `long' usage messages, but
     should still be included in other help messages.  This is intended
     for options that are completely documented in an argp's `args_doc'
     field.  *Note Argp Parsers::.  Including this option in the
     generic usage list would be redundant, and should be avoided.

     For instance, if `args_doc' is `"FOO BAR\n-x BLAH"', and the `-x'
     option's purpose is to distinguish these two cases, `-x' should
     probably be marked `OPTION_NO_USAGE'.


File: libc.info,  Node: Argp Parser Functions,  Next: Argp Children,  Prev: Argp Option Vectors,  Up: Argp Parsers

25.3.5 Argp Parser Functions
----------------------------

The function pointed to by the `parser' field in a `struct argp' (*note
Argp Parsers::) defines what actions take place in response to each
option or argument parsed.  It is also used as a hook, allowing a
parser to perform tasks at certain other points during parsing.

   Argp parser functions have the following type signature:

     error_t PARSER (int KEY, char *ARG, struct argp_state *STATE)

where the arguments are as follows:

KEY
     For each option that is parsed, PARSER is called with a value of
     KEY from that option's `key' field in the option vector.  *Note
     Argp Option Vectors::.  PARSER is also called at other times with
     special reserved keys, such as `ARGP_KEY_ARG' for non-option
     arguments.  *Note Argp Special Keys::.

ARG
     If KEY is an option, ARG is its given value.  This defaults to
     zero if no value is specified.  Only options that have a non-zero
     `arg' field can ever have a value.  These must _always_ have a
     value unless the `OPTION_ARG_OPTIONAL' flag is specified.  If the
     input being parsed specifies a value for an option that doesn't
     allow one, an error results before PARSER ever gets called.

     If KEY is `ARGP_KEY_ARG', ARG is a non-option argument.  Other
     special keys always have a zero ARG.

STATE
     STATE points to a `struct argp_state', containing useful
     information about the current parsing state for use by PARSER.
     *Note Argp Parsing State::.

   When PARSER is called, it should perform whatever action is
appropriate for KEY, and return `0' for success, `ARGP_ERR_UNKNOWN' if
the value of KEY is not handled by this parser function, or a unix
error code if a real error occurred.  *Note Error Codes::.

 -- Macro: int ARGP_ERR_UNKNOWN
     Argp parser functions should return `ARGP_ERR_UNKNOWN' for any KEY
     value they do not recognize, or for non-option arguments (`KEY ==
     ARGP_KEY_ARG') that they are not equipped to handle.

   A typical parser function uses a switch statement on KEY:

     error_t
     parse_opt (int key, char *arg, struct argp_state *state)
     {
       switch (key)
         {
         case OPTION_KEY:
           ACTION
           break;
         ...
         default:
           return ARGP_ERR_UNKNOWN;
         }
       return 0;
     }

* Menu:

* Keys: Argp Special Keys.           Special values for the KEY argument.
* State: Argp Parsing State.         What the STATE argument refers to.
* Functions: Argp Helper Functions.  Functions to help during argp parsing.


File: libc.info,  Node: Argp Special Keys,  Next: Argp Parsing State,  Up: Argp Parser Functions

25.3.5.1 Special Keys for Argp Parser Functions
...............................................

In addition to key values corresponding to user options, the KEY
argument to argp parser functions may have a number of other special
values.  In the following example ARG and STATE refer to parser
function arguments.  *Note Argp Parser Functions::.

`ARGP_KEY_ARG'
     This is not an option at all, but rather a command line argument,
     whose value is pointed to by ARG.

     When there are multiple parser functions in play due to argp
     parsers being combined, it's impossible to know which one will
     handle a specific argument.  Each is called until one returns 0 or
     an error other than `ARGP_ERR_UNKNOWN'; if an argument is not
     handled, `argp_parse' immediately returns success, without parsing
     any more arguments.

     Once a parser function returns success for this key, that fact is
     recorded, and the `ARGP_KEY_NO_ARGS' case won't be used.
     _However_, if while processing the argument a parser function
     decrements the `next' field of its STATE argument, the option
     won't be considered processed; this is to allow you to actually
     modify the argument, perhaps into an option, and have it processed
     again.

`ARGP_KEY_ARGS'
     If a parser function returns `ARGP_ERR_UNKNOWN' for
     `ARGP_KEY_ARG', it is immediately called again with the key
     `ARGP_KEY_ARGS', which has a similar meaning, but is slightly more
     convenient for consuming all remaining arguments.  ARG is 0, and
     the tail of the argument vector may be found at `STATE->argv +
     STATE->next'.  If success is returned for this key, and
     `STATE->next' is unchanged, all remaining arguments are considered
     to have been consumed.  Otherwise, the amount by which
     `STATE->next' has been adjusted indicates how many were used.
     Here's an example that uses both, for different args:

          ...
          case ARGP_KEY_ARG:
            if (STATE->arg_num == 0)
              /* First argument */
              first_arg = ARG;
            else
              /* Let the next case parse it.  */
              return ARGP_KEY_UNKNOWN;
            break;
          case ARGP_KEY_ARGS:
            remaining_args = STATE->argv + STATE->next;
            num_remaining_args = STATE->argc - STATE->next;
            break;

`ARGP_KEY_END'
     This indicates that there are no more command line arguments.
     Parser functions are called in a different order, children first.
     This allows each parser to clean up its state for the parent.

`ARGP_KEY_NO_ARGS'
     Because it's common to do some special processing if there aren't
     any non-option args, parser functions are called with this key if
     they didn't successfully process any non-option arguments.  This
     is called just before `ARGP_KEY_END', where more general validity
     checks on previously parsed arguments take place.

`ARGP_KEY_INIT'
     This is passed in before any parsing is done.  Afterwards, the
     values of each element of the `child_input' field of STATE, if
     any, are copied to each child's state to be the initial value of
     the `input' when _their_ parsers are called.

`ARGP_KEY_SUCCESS'
     Passed in when parsing has successfully been completed, even if
     arguments remain.

`ARGP_KEY_ERROR'
     Passed in if an error has occurred and parsing is terminated.  In
     this case a call with a key of `ARGP_KEY_SUCCESS' is never made.

`ARGP_KEY_FINI'
     The final key ever seen by any parser, even after
     `ARGP_KEY_SUCCESS' and `ARGP_KEY_ERROR'.  Any resources allocated
     by `ARGP_KEY_INIT' may be freed here.  At times, certain resources
     allocated are to be returned to the caller after a successful
     parse.  In that case, those particular resources can be freed in
     the `ARGP_KEY_ERROR' case.

   In all cases, `ARGP_KEY_INIT' is the first key seen by parser
functions, and `ARGP_KEY_FINI' the last, unless an error was returned
by the parser for `ARGP_KEY_INIT'.  Other keys can occur in one the
following orders.  OPT refers to an arbitrary option key:

OPT... `ARGP_KEY_NO_ARGS' `ARGP_KEY_END' `ARGP_KEY_SUCCESS'
     The arguments being parsed did not contain any non-option
     arguments.

( OPT | `ARGP_KEY_ARG' )... `ARGP_KEY_END' `ARGP_KEY_SUCCESS'
     All non-option arguments were successfully handled by a parser
     function.  There may be multiple parser functions if multiple argp
     parsers were combined.

( OPT | `ARGP_KEY_ARG' )... `ARGP_KEY_SUCCESS'
     Some non-option argument went unrecognized.

     This occurs when every parser function returns `ARGP_KEY_UNKNOWN'
     for an argument, in which case parsing stops at that argument if
     ARG_INDEX is a null pointer.  Otherwise an error occurs.

   In all cases, if a non-null value for ARG_INDEX gets passed to
`argp_parse', the index of the first unparsed command-line argument is
passed back in that value.

   If an error occurs and is either detected by argp or because a parser
function returned an error value, each parser is called with
`ARGP_KEY_ERROR'.  No further calls are made, except the final call
with `ARGP_KEY_FINI'.


File: libc.info,  Node: Argp Parsing State,  Next: Argp Helper Functions,  Prev: Argp Special Keys,  Up: Argp Parser Functions

25.3.5.2 Argp Parsing State
...........................

The third argument to argp parser functions (*note Argp Parser
Functions::) is a pointer to a `struct argp_state', which contains
information about the state of the option parsing.

 -- Data Type: struct argp_state
     This structure has the following fields, which may be modified as
     noted:

    `const struct argp *const root_argp'
          The top level argp parser being parsed.  Note that this is
          often _not_ the same `struct argp' passed into `argp_parse' by
          the invoking program.  *Note Argp::.  It is an internal argp
          parser that contains options implemented by `argp_parse'
          itself, such as `--help'.

    `int argc'
    `char **argv'
          The argument vector being parsed.  This may be modified.

    `int next'
          The index in `argv' of the next argument to be parsed.  This
          may be modified.

          One way to consume all remaining arguments in the input is to
          set `STATE->next = STATE->argc', perhaps after recording the
          value of the `next' field to find the consumed arguments.  The
          current option can be re-parsed immediately by decrementing
          this field, then modifying `STATE->argv[STATE->next]' to
          reflect the option that should be reexamined.

    `unsigned flags'
          The flags supplied to `argp_parse'.  These may be modified,
          although some flags may only take effect when `argp_parse' is
          first invoked.  *Note Argp Flags::.

    `unsigned arg_num'
          While calling a parsing function with the KEY argument
          `ARGP_KEY_ARG', this represents the number of the current arg,
          starting at 0.  It is incremented after each `ARGP_KEY_ARG'
          call returns.  At all other times, this is the number of
          `ARGP_KEY_ARG' arguments that have been processed.

    `int quoted'
          If non-zero, the index in `argv' of the first argument
          following a special `--' argument.  This prevents anything
          that follows from being interpreted as an option.  It is only
          set after argument parsing has proceeded past this point.

    `void *input'
          An arbitrary pointer passed in from the caller of
          `argp_parse', in the INPUT argument.

    `void **child_inputs'
          These are values that will be passed to child parsers.  This
          vector will be the same length as the number of children in
          the current parser.  Each child parser will be given the
          value of `STATE->child_inputs[I]' as _its_ `STATE->input'
          field, where I is the index of the child in the this parser's
          `children' field.  *Note Argp Children::.

    `void *hook'
          For the parser function's use.  Initialized to 0, but
          otherwise ignored by argp.

    `char *name'
          The name used when printing messages.  This is initialized to
          `argv[0]', or `program_invocation_name' if `argv[0]' is
          unavailable.

    `FILE *err_stream'
    `FILE *out_stream'
          The stdio streams used when argp prints.  Error messages are
          printed to `err_stream', all other output, such as `--help'
          output) to `out_stream'.  These are initialized to `stderr'
          and `stdout' respectively.  *Note Standard Streams::.

    `void *pstate'
          Private, for use by the argp implementation.


File: libc.info,  Node: Argp Helper Functions,  Prev: Argp Parsing State,  Up: Argp Parser Functions

25.3.5.3 Functions For Use in Argp Parsers
..........................................

Argp provides a number of functions available to the user of argp
(*note Argp Parser Functions::), mostly for producing error messages.
These take as their first argument the STATE argument to the parser
function.  *Note Argp Parsing State::.

 -- Function: void argp_usage (const struct argp_state *STATE)
     Preliminary: | MT-Unsafe race:argpbuf env locale | AS-Unsafe heap
     i18n corrupt | AC-Unsafe mem corrupt lock | *Note POSIX Safety
     Concepts::.

     Outputs the standard usage message for the argp parser referred to
     by STATE to `STATE->err_stream' and terminate the program with
     `exit (argp_err_exit_status)'.  *Note Argp Global Variables::.

 -- Function: void argp_error (const struct argp_state *STATE, const
          char *FMT, ...)
     Preliminary: | MT-Unsafe race:argpbuf env locale | AS-Unsafe heap
     i18n corrupt | AC-Unsafe mem corrupt lock | *Note POSIX Safety
     Concepts::.

     Prints the printf format string FMT and following args, preceded
     by the program name and `:', and followed by a `Try ... --help'
     message, and terminates the program with an exit status of
     `argp_err_exit_status'.  *Note Argp Global Variables::.

 -- Function: void argp_failure (const struct argp_state *STATE, int
          STATUS, int ERRNUM, const char *FMT, ...)
     Preliminary: | MT-Safe | AS-Unsafe corrupt heap | AC-Unsafe lock
     corrupt mem | *Note POSIX Safety Concepts::.

     Similar to the standard gnu error-reporting function `error', this
     prints the program name and `:', the printf format string FMT, and
     the appropriate following args.  If it is non-zero, the standard
     unix error text for ERRNUM is printed.  If STATUS is non-zero, it
     terminates the program with that value as its exit status.

     The difference between `argp_failure' and `argp_error' is that
     `argp_error' is for _parsing errors_, whereas `argp_failure' is
     for other problems that occur during parsing but don't reflect a
     syntactic problem with the input, such as illegal values for
     options, bad phase of the moon, etc.

 -- Function: void argp_state_help (const struct argp_state *STATE,
          FILE *STREAM, unsigned FLAGS)
     Preliminary: | MT-Unsafe race:argpbuf env locale | AS-Unsafe heap
     i18n corrupt | AC-Unsafe mem corrupt lock | *Note POSIX Safety
     Concepts::.

     Outputs a help message for the argp parser referred to by STATE,
     to STREAM.  The FLAGS argument determines what sort of help
     message is produced.  *Note Argp Help Flags::.

   Error output is sent to `STATE->err_stream', and the program name
printed is `STATE->name'.

   The output or program termination behavior of these functions may be
suppressed if the `ARGP_NO_EXIT' or `ARGP_NO_ERRS' flags are passed to
`argp_parse'.  *Note Argp Flags::.

   This behavior is useful if an argp parser is exported for use by
other programs (e.g., by a library), and may be used in a context where
it is not desirable to terminate the program in response to parsing
errors.  In argp parsers intended for such general use, and for the
case where the program _doesn't_ terminate, calls to any of these
functions should be followed by code that returns the appropriate error
code:

     if (BAD ARGUMENT SYNTAX)
       {
          argp_usage (STATE);
          return EINVAL;
       }

If a parser function will _only_ be used when `ARGP_NO_EXIT' is not
set, the return may be omitted.


File: libc.info,  Node: Argp Children,  Next: Argp Help Filtering,  Prev: Argp Parser Functions,  Up: Argp Parsers

25.3.6 Combining Multiple Argp Parsers
--------------------------------------

The `children' field in a `struct argp' enables other argp parsers to
be combined with the referencing one for the parsing of a single set of
arguments.  This field should point to a vector of `struct argp_child',
which is terminated by an entry having a value of zero in the `argp'
field.

   Where conflicts between combined parsers arise, as when two specify
an option with the same name, the parser conflicts are resolved in
favor of the parent argp parser(s), or the earlier of the argp parsers
in the list of children.

 -- Data Type: struct argp_child
     An entry in the list of subsidiary argp parsers pointed to by the
     `children' field in a `struct argp'.  The fields are as follows:

    `const struct argp *argp'
          The child argp parser, or zero to end of the list.

    `int flags'
          Flags for this child.

    `const char *header'
          If non-zero, this is an optional header to be printed within
          help output before the child options.  As a side-effect, a
          non-zero value forces the child options to be grouped
          together.  To achieve this effect without actually printing a
          header string, use a value of `""'.  As with header strings
          specified in an option entry, the conventional value of the
          last character is `:'.  *Note Argp Option Vectors::.

    `int group'
          This is where the child options are grouped relative to the
          other `consolidated' options in the parent argp parser.  The
          values are the same as the `group' field in `struct
          argp_option'.  *Note Argp Option Vectors::.  All
          child-groupings follow parent options at a particular group
          level.  If both this field and `header' are zero, then the
          child's options aren't grouped together, they are merged with
          parent options at the parent option group level.



File: libc.info,  Node: Argp Flags,  Next: Argp Help,  Prev: Argp Parsers,  Up: Argp

25.3.7 Flags for `argp_parse'
-----------------------------

The default behavior of `argp_parse' is designed to be convenient for
the most common case of parsing program command line argument.  To
modify these defaults, the following flags may be or'd together in the
FLAGS argument to `argp_parse':

`ARGP_PARSE_ARGV0'
     Don't ignore the first element of the ARGV argument to
     `argp_parse'.  Unless `ARGP_NO_ERRS' is set, the first element of
     the argument vector is skipped for option parsing purposes, as it
     corresponds to the program name in a command line.

`ARGP_NO_ERRS'
     Don't print error messages for unknown options to `stderr'; unless
     this flag is set, `ARGP_PARSE_ARGV0' is ignored, as `argv[0]' is
     used as the program name in the error messages.  This flag implies
     `ARGP_NO_EXIT'.  This is based on the assumption that silent
     exiting upon errors is bad behavior.

`ARGP_NO_ARGS'
     Don't parse any non-option args.  Normally these are parsed by
     calling the parse functions with a key of `ARGP_KEY_ARG', the
     actual argument being the value.  This flag needn't normally be
     set, as the default behavior is to stop parsing as soon as an
     argument fails to be parsed.  *Note Argp Parser Functions::.

`ARGP_IN_ORDER'
     Parse options and arguments in the same order they occur on the
     command line.  Normally they're rearranged so that all options
     come first.

`ARGP_NO_HELP'
     Don't provide the standard long option `--help', which ordinarily
     causes usage and option help information to be output to `stdout'
     and `exit (0)'.

`ARGP_NO_EXIT'
     Don't exit on errors, although they may still result in error
     messages.

`ARGP_LONG_ONLY'
     Use the gnu getopt `long-only' rules for parsing arguments.  This
     allows long-options to be recognized with only a single `-' (i.e.,
     `-help').  This results in a less useful interface, and its use is
     discouraged as it conflicts with the way most GNU programs work as
     well as the GNU coding standards.

`ARGP_SILENT'
     Turns off any message-printing/exiting options, specifically
     `ARGP_NO_EXIT', `ARGP_NO_ERRS', and `ARGP_NO_HELP'.


File: libc.info,  Node: Argp Help Filtering,  Prev: Argp Children,  Up: Argp Parsers

25.3.8 Customizing Argp Help Output
-----------------------------------

The `help_filter' field in a `struct argp' is a pointer to a function
that filters the text of help messages before displaying them.  They
have a function signature like:

     char *HELP-FILTER (int KEY, const char *TEXT, void *INPUT)

Where KEY is either a key from an option, in which case TEXT is that
option's help text.  *Note Argp Option Vectors::.  Alternately, one of
the special keys with names beginning with `ARGP_KEY_HELP_' might be
used, describing which other help text TEXT will contain.  *Note Argp
Help Filter Keys::.

   The function should return either TEXT if it remains as-is, or a
replacement string allocated using `malloc'.  This will be either be
freed by argp or zero, which prints nothing.  The value of TEXT is
supplied _after_ any translation has been done, so if any of the
replacement text needs translation, it will be done by the filter
function.  INPUT is either the input supplied to `argp_parse' or it is
zero, if `argp_help' was called directly by the user.

* Menu:

* Keys: Argp Help Filter Keys.  Special KEY values for help filter functions.


File: libc.info,  Node: Argp Help Filter Keys,  Up: Argp Help Filtering

25.3.8.1 Special Keys for Argp Help Filter Functions
....................................................

The following special values may be passed to an argp help filter
function as the first argument in addition to key values for user
options.  They specify which help text the TEXT argument contains:

`ARGP_KEY_HELP_PRE_DOC'
     The help text preceding options.

`ARGP_KEY_HELP_POST_DOC'
     The help text following options.

`ARGP_KEY_HELP_HEADER'
     The option header string.

`ARGP_KEY_HELP_EXTRA'
     This is used after all other documentation; TEXT is zero for this
     key.

`ARGP_KEY_HELP_DUP_ARGS_NOTE'
     The explanatory note printed when duplicate option arguments have
     been suppressed.

`ARGP_KEY_HELP_ARGS_DOC'
     The argument doc string; formally the `args_doc' field from the
     argp parser.  *Note Argp Parsers::.


File: libc.info,  Node: Argp Help,  Next: Argp Examples,  Prev: Argp Flags,  Up: Argp

25.3.9 The `argp_help' Function
-------------------------------

Normally programs using argp need not be written with particular
printing argument-usage-type help messages in mind as the standard
`--help' option is handled automatically by argp.  Typical error cases
can be handled using `argp_usage' and `argp_error'.  *Note Argp Helper
Functions::.  However, if it's desirable to print a help message in
some context other than parsing the program options, argp offers the
`argp_help' interface.

 -- Function: void argp_help (const struct argp *ARGP, FILE *STREAM,
          unsigned FLAGS, char *NAME)
     Preliminary: | MT-Unsafe race:argpbuf env locale | AS-Unsafe heap
     i18n corrupt | AC-Unsafe mem corrupt lock | *Note POSIX Safety
     Concepts::.

     This outputs a help message for the argp parser ARGP to STREAM.
     The type of messages printed will be determined by FLAGS.

     Any options such as `--help' that are implemented automatically by
     argp itself will _not_ be present in the help output; for this
     reason it is best to use `argp_state_help' if calling from within
     an argp parser function.  *Note Argp Helper Functions::.

* Menu:

* Flags: Argp Help Flags.       Specifying what sort of help message to print.


File: libc.info,  Node: Argp Help Flags,  Up: Argp Help

25.3.10 Flags for the `argp_help' Function
------------------------------------------

When calling `argp_help' (*note Argp Help::) or `argp_state_help'
(*note Argp Helper Functions::) the exact output is determined by the
FLAGS argument.  This should consist of any of the following flags,
or'd together:

`ARGP_HELP_USAGE'
     A unix `Usage:' message that explicitly lists all options.

`ARGP_HELP_SHORT_USAGE'
     A unix `Usage:' message that displays an appropriate placeholder to
     indicate where the options go; useful for showing the non-option
     argument syntax.

`ARGP_HELP_SEE'
     A `Try ... for more help' message; `...' contains the program name
     and `--help'.

`ARGP_HELP_LONG'
     A verbose option help message that gives each option available
     along with its documentation string.

`ARGP_HELP_PRE_DOC'
     The part of the argp parser doc string preceding the verbose
     option help.

`ARGP_HELP_POST_DOC'
     The part of the argp parser doc string that following the verbose
     option help.

`ARGP_HELP_DOC'
     `(ARGP_HELP_PRE_DOC | ARGP_HELP_POST_DOC)'

`ARGP_HELP_BUG_ADDR'
     A message that prints where to report bugs for this program, if the
     `argp_program_bug_address' variable contains this information.

`ARGP_HELP_LONG_ONLY'
     This will modify any output to reflect the `ARGP_LONG_ONLY' mode.

   The following flags are only understood when used with
`argp_state_help'.  They control whether the function returns after
printing its output, or terminates the program:

`ARGP_HELP_EXIT_ERR'
     This will terminate the program with `exit (argp_err_exit_status)'.

`ARGP_HELP_EXIT_OK'
     This will terminate the program with `exit (0)'.

   The following flags are combinations of the basic flags for printing
standard messages:

`ARGP_HELP_STD_ERR'
     Assuming that an error message for a parsing error has printed,
     this prints a message on how to get help, and terminates the
     program with an error.

`ARGP_HELP_STD_USAGE'
     This prints a standard usage message and terminates the program
     with an error.  This is used when no other specific error messages
     are appropriate or available.

`ARGP_HELP_STD_HELP'
     This prints the standard response for a `--help' option, and
     terminates the program successfully.


File: libc.info,  Node: Argp Examples,  Next: Argp User Customization,  Prev: Argp Help,  Up: Argp

25.3.11 Argp Examples
---------------------

These example programs demonstrate the basic usage of argp.

* Menu:

* 1: Argp Example 1.            A minimal program using argp.
* 2: Argp Example 2.            A program using only default options.
* 3: Argp Example 3.            A simple program with user options.
* 4: Argp Example 4.            Combining multiple argp parsers.


File: libc.info,  Node: Argp Example 1,  Next: Argp Example 2,  Up: Argp Examples

25.3.11.1 A Minimal Program Using Argp
......................................

This is perhaps the smallest program possible that uses argp.  It won't
do much except give an error messages and exit when there are any
arguments, and prints a rather pointless message for `--help'.


     /* This is (probably) the smallest possible program that
        uses argp.  It won't do much except give an error
        messages and exit when there are any arguments, and print
        a (rather pointless) messages for -help. */

     #include <stdlib.h>
     #include <argp.h>

     int
     main (int argc, char **argv)
     {
       argp_parse (0, argc, argv, 0, 0, 0);
       exit (0);
     }


File: libc.info,  Node: Argp Example 2,  Next: Argp Example 3,  Prev: Argp Example 1,  Up: Argp Examples

25.3.11.2 A Program Using Argp with Only Default Options
........................................................

This program doesn't use any options or arguments, it uses argp to be
compliant with the GNU standard command line format.

   In addition to giving no arguments and implementing a `--help'
option, this example has a `--version' option, which will put the given
documentation string and bug address in the `--help' output, as per GNU
standards.

   The variable `argp' contains the argument parser specification.
Adding fields to this structure is the way most parameters are passed
to `argp_parse'.  The first three fields are normally used, but they
are not in this small program.  There are also two global variables
that argp can use defined here, `argp_program_version' and
`argp_program_bug_address'.  They are considered global variables
because they will almost always be constant for a given program, even
if they use different argument parsers for various tasks.


     /* This program doesn't use any options or arguments, but uses
        argp to be compliant with the GNU standard command line
        format.

        In addition to making sure no arguments are given, and
        implementing a -help option, this example will have a
        -version option, and will put the given documentation string
        and bug address in the -help output, as per GNU standards.

        The variable ARGP contains the argument parser specification;
        adding fields to this structure is the way most parameters are
        passed to argp_parse (the first three fields are usually used,
        but not in this small program).  There are also two global
        variables that argp knows about defined here,
        ARGP_PROGRAM_VERSION and ARGP_PROGRAM_BUG_ADDRESS (they are
        global variables because they will almost always be constant
        for a given program, even if it uses different argument
        parsers for various tasks). */

     #include <stdlib.h>
     #include <argp.h>

     const char *argp_program_version =
       "argp-ex2 1.0";
     const char *argp_program_bug_address =
       "<bug-gnu-utils@gnu.org>";

     /* Program documentation. */
     static char doc[] =
       "Argp example #2 -- a pretty minimal program using argp";

     /* Our argument parser.  The `options', `parser', and
        `args_doc' fields are zero because we have neither options or
        arguments; `doc' and `argp_program_bug_address' will be
        used in the output for `--help', and the `--version'
        option will print out `argp_program_version'. */
     static struct argp argp = { 0, 0, 0, doc };

     int
     main (int argc, char **argv)
     {
       argp_parse (&argp, argc, argv, 0, 0, 0);
       exit (0);
     }


File: libc.info,  Node: Argp Example 3,  Next: Argp Example 4,  Prev: Argp Example 2,  Up: Argp Examples

25.3.11.3 A Program Using Argp with User Options
................................................

This program uses the same features as example 2, adding user options
and arguments.

   We now use the first four fields in `argp' (*note Argp Parsers::)
and specify `parse_opt' as the parser function.  *Note Argp Parser
Functions::.

   Note that in this example, `main' uses a structure to communicate
with the `parse_opt' function, a pointer to which it passes in the
`input' argument to `argp_parse'.  *Note Argp::.  It is retrieved by
`parse_opt' through the `input' field in its `state' argument.  *Note
Argp Parsing State::.  Of course, it's also possible to use global
variables instead, but using a structure like this is somewhat more
flexible and clean.


     /* This program uses the same features as example 2, and uses options and
        arguments.

        We now use the first four fields in ARGP, so here's a description of them:
          OPTIONS  - A pointer to a vector of struct argp_option (see below)
          PARSER   - A function to parse a single option, called by argp
          ARGS_DOC - A string describing how the non-option arguments should look
          DOC      - A descriptive string about this program; if it contains a
                      vertical tab character (\v), the part after it will be
                      printed *following* the options

        The function PARSER takes the following arguments:
          KEY  - An integer specifying which option this is (taken
                  from the KEY field in each struct argp_option), or
                  a special key specifying something else; the only
                  special keys we use here are ARGP_KEY_ARG, meaning
                  a non-option argument, and ARGP_KEY_END, meaning
                  that all arguments have been parsed
          ARG  - For an option KEY, the string value of its
                  argument, or NULL if it has none
          STATE- A pointer to a struct argp_state, containing
                  various useful information about the parsing state; used here
                  are the INPUT field, which reflects the INPUT argument to
                  argp_parse, and the ARG_NUM field, which is the number of the
                  current non-option argument being parsed
        It should return either 0, meaning success, ARGP_ERR_UNKNOWN, meaning the
        given KEY wasn't recognized, or an errno value indicating some other
        error.

        Note that in this example, main uses a structure to communicate with the
        parse_opt function, a pointer to which it passes in the INPUT argument to
        argp_parse.  Of course, it's also possible to use global variables
        instead, but this is somewhat more flexible.

        The OPTIONS field contains a pointer to a vector of struct argp_option's;
        that structure has the following fields (if you assign your option
        structures using array initialization like this example, unspecified
        fields will be defaulted to 0, and need not be specified):
          NAME   - The name of this option's long option (may be zero)
          KEY    - The KEY to pass to the PARSER function when parsing this option,
                    *and* the name of this option's short option, if it is a
                    printable ascii character
          ARG    - The name of this option's argument, if any
          FLAGS  - Flags describing this option; some of them are:
                      OPTION_ARG_OPTIONAL - The argument to this option is optional
                      OPTION_ALIAS        - This option is an alias for the
                                             previous option
                      OPTION_HIDDEN       - Don't show this option in -help output
          DOC    - A documentation string for this option, shown in -help output

        An options vector should be terminated by an option with all fields zero. */

     #include <stdlib.h>
     #include <argp.h>

     const char *argp_program_version =
       "argp-ex3 1.0";
     const char *argp_program_bug_address =
       "<bug-gnu-utils@gnu.org>";

     /* Program documentation. */
     static char doc[] =
       "Argp example #3 -- a program with options and arguments using argp";

     /* A description of the arguments we accept. */
     static char args_doc[] = "ARG1 ARG2";

     /* The options we understand. */
     static struct argp_option options[] = {
       {"verbose",  'v', 0,      0,  "Produce verbose output" },
       {"quiet",    'q', 0,      0,  "Don't produce any output" },
       {"silent",   's', 0,      OPTION_ALIAS },
       {"output",   'o', "FILE", 0,
        "Output to FILE instead of standard output" },
       { 0 }
     };

     /* Used by `main' to communicate with `parse_opt'. */
     struct arguments
     {
       char *args[2];                /* ARG1 & ARG2 */
       int silent, verbose;
       char *output_file;
     };

     /* Parse a single option. */
     static error_t
     parse_opt (int key, char *arg, struct argp_state *state)
     {
       /* Get the INPUT argument from `argp_parse', which we
          know is a pointer to our arguments structure. */
       struct arguments *arguments = state->input;

       switch (key)
         {
         case 'q': case 's':
           arguments->silent = 1;
           break;
         case 'v':
           arguments->verbose = 1;
           break;
         case 'o':
           arguments->output_file = arg;
           break;

         case ARGP_KEY_ARG:
           if (state->arg_num >= 2)
             /* Too many arguments. */
             argp_usage (state);

           arguments->args[state->arg_num] = arg;

           break;

         case ARGP_KEY_END:
           if (state->arg_num < 2)
             /* Not enough arguments. */
             argp_usage (state);
           break;

         default:
           return ARGP_ERR_UNKNOWN;
         }
       return 0;
     }

     /* Our argp parser. */
     static struct argp argp = { options, parse_opt, args_doc, doc };

     int
     main (int argc, char **argv)
     {
       struct arguments arguments;

       /* Default values. */
       arguments.silent = 0;
       arguments.verbose = 0;
       arguments.output_file = "-";

       /* Parse our arguments; every option seen by `parse_opt' will
          be reflected in `arguments'. */
       argp_parse (&argp, argc, argv, 0, 0, &arguments);

       printf ("ARG1 = %s\nARG2 = %s\nOUTPUT_FILE = %s\n"
               "VERBOSE = %s\nSILENT = %s\n",
               arguments.args[0], arguments.args[1],
               arguments.output_file,
               arguments.verbose ? "yes" : "no",
               arguments.silent ? "yes" : "no");

       exit (0);
     }


File: libc.info,  Node: Argp Example 4,  Prev: Argp Example 3,  Up: Argp Examples

25.3.11.4 A Program Using Multiple Combined Argp Parsers
........................................................

This program uses the same features as example 3, but has more options,
and presents more structure in the `--help' output.  It also
illustrates how you can `steal' the remainder of the input arguments
past a certain point for programs that accept a list of items.  It also
illustrates the KEY value `ARGP_KEY_NO_ARGS', which is only given if no
non-option arguments were supplied to the program.  *Note Argp Special
Keys::.

   For structuring help output, two features are used: _headers_ and a
two part option string.  The _headers_ are entries in the options
vector.  *Note Argp Option Vectors::.  The first four fields are zero.
The two part documentation string are in the variable `doc', which
allows documentation both before and after the options.  *Note Argp
Parsers::, the two parts of `doc' are separated by a vertical-tab
character (`'\v'', or `'\013'').  By convention, the documentation
before the options is a short string stating what the program does, and
after any options it is longer, describing the behavior in more detail.
All documentation strings are automatically filled for output, although
newlines may be included to force a line break at a particular point.
In addition, documentation strings are passed to the `gettext'
function, for possible translation into the current locale.


     /* This program uses the same features as example 3, but has more
        options, and somewhat more structure in the -help output.  It
        also shows how you can `steal' the remainder of the input
        arguments past a certain point, for programs that accept a
        list of items.  It also shows the special argp KEY value
        ARGP_KEY_NO_ARGS, which is only given if no non-option
        arguments were supplied to the program.

        For structuring the help output, two features are used,
        *headers* which are entries in the options vector with the
        first four fields being zero, and a two part documentation
        string (in the variable DOC), which allows documentation both
        before and after the options; the two parts of DOC are
        separated by a vertical-tab character ('\v', or '\013').  By
        convention, the documentation before the options is just a
        short string saying what the program does, and that afterwards
        is longer, describing the behavior in more detail.  All
        documentation strings are automatically filled for output,
        although newlines may be included to force a line break at a
        particular point.  All documentation strings are also passed to
        the `gettext' function, for possible translation into the
        current locale. */

     #include <stdlib.h>
     #include <error.h>
     #include <argp.h>

     const char *argp_program_version =
       "argp-ex4 1.0";
     const char *argp_program_bug_address =
       "<bug-gnu-utils@prep.ai.mit.edu>";

     /* Program documentation. */
     static char doc[] =
       "Argp example #4 -- a program with somewhat more complicated\
     options\
     \vThis part of the documentation comes *after* the options;\
      note that the text is automatically filled, but it's possible\
      to force a line-break, e.g.\n<-- here.";

     /* A description of the arguments we accept. */
     static char args_doc[] = "ARG1 [STRING...]";

     /* Keys for options without short-options. */
     #define OPT_ABORT  1            /* -abort */

     /* The options we understand. */
     static struct argp_option options[] = {
       {"verbose",  'v', 0,       0, "Produce verbose output" },
       {"quiet",    'q', 0,       0, "Don't produce any output" },
       {"silent",   's', 0,       OPTION_ALIAS },
       {"output",   'o', "FILE",  0,
        "Output to FILE instead of standard output" },

       {0,0,0,0, "The following options should be grouped together:" },
       {"repeat",   'r', "COUNT", OPTION_ARG_OPTIONAL,
        "Repeat the output COUNT (default 10) times"},
       {"abort",    OPT_ABORT, 0, 0, "Abort before showing any output"},

       { 0 }
     };

     /* Used by `main' to communicate with `parse_opt'. */
     struct arguments
     {
       char *arg1;                   /* ARG1 */
       char **strings;               /* [STRING...] */
       int silent, verbose, abort;   /* `-s', `-v', `--abort' */
       char *output_file;            /* FILE arg to `--output' */
       int repeat_count;             /* COUNT arg to `--repeat' */
     };

     /* Parse a single option. */
     static error_t
     parse_opt (int key, char *arg, struct argp_state *state)
     {
       /* Get the `input' argument from `argp_parse', which we
          know is a pointer to our arguments structure. */
       struct arguments *arguments = state->input;

       switch (key)
         {
         case 'q': case 's':
           arguments->silent = 1;
           break;
         case 'v':
           arguments->verbose = 1;
           break;
         case 'o':
           arguments->output_file = arg;
           break;
         case 'r':
           arguments->repeat_count = arg ? atoi (arg) : 10;
           break;
         case OPT_ABORT:
           arguments->abort = 1;
           break;

         case ARGP_KEY_NO_ARGS:
           argp_usage (state);

         case ARGP_KEY_ARG:
           /* Here we know that `state->arg_num == 0', since we
              force argument parsing to end before any more arguments can
              get here. */
           arguments->arg1 = arg;

           /* Now we consume all the rest of the arguments.
              `state->next' is the index in `state->argv' of the
              next argument to be parsed, which is the first STRING
              we're interested in, so we can just use
              `&state->argv[state->next]' as the value for
              arguments->strings.

              _In addition_, by setting `state->next' to the end
              of the arguments, we can force argp to stop parsing here and
              return. */
           arguments->strings = &state->argv[state->next];
           state->next = state->argc;

           break;

         default:
           return ARGP_ERR_UNKNOWN;
         }
       return 0;
     }

     /* Our argp parser. */
     static struct argp argp = { options, parse_opt, args_doc, doc };

     int
     main (int argc, char **argv)
     {
       int i, j;
       struct arguments arguments;

       /* Default values. */
       arguments.silent = 0;
       arguments.verbose = 0;
       arguments.output_file = "-";
       arguments.repeat_count = 1;
       arguments.abort = 0;

       /* Parse our arguments; every option seen by `parse_opt' will be
          reflected in `arguments'. */
       argp_parse (&argp, argc, argv, 0, 0, &arguments);

       if (arguments.abort)
         error (10, 0, "ABORTED");

       for (i = 0; i < arguments.repeat_count; i++)
         {
           printf ("ARG1 = %s\n", arguments.arg1);
           printf ("STRINGS = ");
           for (j = 0; arguments.strings[j]; j++)
             printf (j == 0 ? "%s" : ", %s", arguments.strings[j]);
           printf ("\n");
           printf ("OUTPUT_FILE = %s\nVERBOSE = %s\nSILENT = %s\n",
                   arguments.output_file,
                   arguments.verbose ? "yes" : "no",
                   arguments.silent ? "yes" : "no");
         }

       exit (0);
     }


File: libc.info,  Node: Argp User Customization,  Prev: Argp Examples,  Up: Argp

25.3.12 Argp User Customization
-------------------------------

The formatting of argp `--help' output may be controlled to some extent
by a program's users, by setting the `ARGP_HELP_FMT' environment
variable to a comma-separated list of tokens.  Whitespace is ignored:

`dup-args'
`no-dup-args'
     These turn "duplicate-argument-mode" on or off.  In duplicate
     argument mode, if an option that accepts an argument has multiple
     names, the argument is shown for each name.  Otherwise, it is only
     shown for the first long option.  A note is subsequently printed
     so the user knows that it applies to other names as well.  The
     default is `no-dup-args', which is less consistent, but prettier.

`dup-args-note'

`no-dup-args-note'
     These will enable or disable the note informing the user of
     suppressed option argument duplication.  The default is
     `dup-args-note'.

`short-opt-col=N'
     This prints the first short option in column N.  The default is 2.

`long-opt-col=N'
     This prints the first long option in column N.  The default is 6.

`doc-opt-col=N'
     This prints `documentation options' (*note Argp Option Flags::) in
     column N.  The default is 2.

`opt-doc-col=N'
     This prints the documentation for options starting in column N.
     The default is 29.

`header-col=N'
     This will indent the group headers that document groups of options
     to column N.  The default is 1.

`usage-indent=N'
     This will indent continuation lines in `Usage:' messages to column
     N.  The default is 12.

`rmargin=N'
     This will word wrap help output at or before column N.  The default
     is 79.


File: libc.info,  Node: Suboptions,  Next: Suboptions Example,  Prev: Argp,  Up: Parsing Program Arguments

25.3.12.1 Parsing of Suboptions
...............................

Having a single level of options is sometimes not enough.  There might
be too many options which have to be available or a set of options is
closely related.

   For this case some programs use suboptions.  One of the most
prominent programs is certainly `mount'(8).  The `-o' option take one
argument which itself is a comma separated list of options.  To ease the
programming of code like this the function `getsubopt' is available.

 -- Function: int getsubopt (char **OPTIONP, char *const *TOKENS, char
          **VALUEP)
     Preliminary: | MT-Safe | AS-Safe | AC-Safe | *Note POSIX Safety
     Concepts::.

     The OPTIONP parameter must be a pointer to a variable containing
     the address of the string to process.  When the function returns
     the reference is updated to point to the next suboption or to the
     terminating `\0' character if there is no more suboption available.

     The TOKENS parameter references an array of strings containing the
     known suboptions.  All strings must be `\0' terminated and to mark
     the end a null pointer must be stored.  When `getsubopt' finds a
     possible legal suboption it compares it with all strings available
     in the TOKENS array and returns the index in the string as the
     indicator.

     In case the suboption has an associated value introduced by a `='
     character, a pointer to the value is returned in VALUEP.  The
     string is `\0' terminated.  If no argument is available VALUEP is
     set to the null pointer.  By doing this the caller can check
     whether a necessary value is given or whether no unexpected value
     is present.

     In case the next suboption in the string is not mentioned in the
     TOKENS array the starting address of the suboption including a
     possible value is returned in VALUEP and the return value of the
     function is `-1'.


File: libc.info,  Node: Suboptions Example,  Prev: Suboptions,  Up: Parsing Program Arguments

25.3.13 Parsing of Suboptions Example
-------------------------------------

The code which might appear in the `mount'(8) program is a perfect
example of the use of `getsubopt':


     #include <stdio.h>
     #include <stdlib.h>
     #include <unistd.h>

     int do_all;
     const char *type;
     int read_size;
     int write_size;
     int read_only;

     enum
     {
       RO_OPTION = 0,
       RW_OPTION,
       READ_SIZE_OPTION,
       WRITE_SIZE_OPTION,
       THE_END
     };

     const char *mount_opts[] =
     {
       [RO_OPTION] = "ro",
       [RW_OPTION] = "rw",
       [READ_SIZE_OPTION] = "rsize",
       [WRITE_SIZE_OPTION] = "wsize",
       [THE_END] = NULL
     };

     int
     main (int argc, char **argv)
     {
       char *subopts, *value;
       int opt;

       while ((opt = getopt (argc, argv, "at:o:")) != -1)
         switch (opt)
           {
           case 'a':
             do_all = 1;
             break;
           case 't':
             type = optarg;
             break;
           case 'o':
             subopts = optarg;
             while (*subopts != '\0')
               switch (getsubopt (&subopts, mount_opts, &value))
                 {
                 case RO_OPTION:
                   read_only = 1;
                   break;
                 case RW_OPTION:
                   read_only = 0;
                   break;
                 case READ_SIZE_OPTION:
                   if (value == NULL)
                     abort ();
                   read_size = atoi (value);
                   break;
                 case WRITE_SIZE_OPTION:
                   if (value == NULL)
                     abort ();
                   write_size = atoi (value);
                   break;
                 default:
                   /* Unknown suboption. */
                   printf ("Unknown suboption `%s'\n", value);
                   break;
                 }
             break;
           default:
             abort ();
           }

       /* Do the real work. */

       return 0;
     }


File: libc.info,  Node: Environment Variables,  Next: Auxiliary Vector,  Prev: Program Arguments,  Up: Program Basics

25.4 Environment Variables
==========================

When a program is executed, it receives information about the context in
which it was invoked in two ways.  The first mechanism uses the ARGV
and ARGC arguments to its `main' function, and is discussed in *note
Program Arguments::.  The second mechanism uses "environment variables"
and is discussed in this section.

   The ARGV mechanism is typically used to pass command-line arguments
specific to the particular program being invoked.  The environment, on
the other hand, keeps track of information that is shared by many
programs, changes infrequently, and that is less frequently used.

   The environment variables discussed in this section are the same
environment variables that you set using assignments and the `export'
command in the shell.  Programs executed from the shell inherit all of
the environment variables from the shell.

   Standard environment variables are used for information about the
user's home directory, terminal type, current locale, and so on; you
can define additional variables for other purposes.  The set of all
environment variables that have values is collectively known as the
"environment".

   Names of environment variables are case-sensitive and must not
contain the character `='.  System-defined environment variables are
invariably uppercase.

   The values of environment variables can be anything that can be
represented as a string.  A value must not contain an embedded null
character, since this is assumed to terminate the string.

* Menu:

* Environment Access::          How to get and set the values of
				 environment variables.
* Standard Environment::        These environment variables have
                		 standard interpretations.


File: libc.info,  Node: Environment Access,  Next: Standard Environment,  Up: Environment Variables

25.4.1 Environment Access
-------------------------

The value of an environment variable can be accessed with the `getenv'
function.  This is declared in the header file `stdlib.h'.  

   Libraries should use `secure_getenv' instead of `getenv', so that
they do not accidentally use untrusted environment variables.
Modifications of environment variables are not allowed in
multi-threaded programs.  The `getenv' and `secure_getenv' functions
can be safely used in multi-threaded programs.

 -- Function: char * getenv (const char *NAME)
     Preliminary: | MT-Safe env | AS-Safe | AC-Safe | *Note POSIX
     Safety Concepts::.

     This function returns a string that is the value of the environment
     variable NAME.  You must not modify this string.  In some non-Unix
     systems not using the GNU C Library, it might be overwritten by
     subsequent calls to `getenv' (but not by any other library
     function).  If the environment variable NAME is not defined, the
     value is a null pointer.

 -- Function: char * secure_getenv (const char *NAME)
     Preliminary: | MT-Safe env | AS-Safe | AC-Safe | *Note POSIX
     Safety Concepts::.

     This function is similar to `getenv', but it returns a null
     pointer if the environment is untrusted.  This happens when the
     program file has SUID or SGID bits set.  General-purpose libraries
     should always prefer this function over `getenv' to avoid
     vulnerabilities if the library is referenced from a SUID/SGID
     program.

     This function is a GNU extension.

 -- Function: int putenv (char *STRING)
     Preliminary: | MT-Unsafe const:env | AS-Unsafe heap lock |
     AC-Unsafe corrupt lock mem | *Note POSIX Safety Concepts::.

     The `putenv' function adds or removes definitions from the
     environment.  If the STRING is of the form `NAME=VALUE', the
     definition is added to the environment.  Otherwise, the STRING is
     interpreted as the name of an environment variable, and any
     definition for this variable in the environment is removed.

     If the function is successful it returns `0'.  Otherwise the return
     value is nonzero and `errno' is set to indicate the error.

     The difference to the `setenv' function is that the exact string
     given as the parameter STRING is put into the environment.  If the
     user should change the string after the `putenv' call this will
     reflect automatically in the environment.  This also requires that
     STRING not be an automatic variable whose scope is left before the
     variable is removed from the environment.  The same applies of
     course to dynamically allocated variables which are freed later.

     This function is part of the extended Unix interface.  Since it
     was also available in old SVID libraries you should define either
     _XOPEN_SOURCE or _SVID_SOURCE before including any header.

 -- Function: int setenv (const char *NAME, const char *VALUE, int
          REPLACE)
     Preliminary: | MT-Unsafe const:env | AS-Unsafe heap lock |
     AC-Unsafe corrupt lock mem | *Note POSIX Safety Concepts::.

     The `setenv' function can be used to add a new definition to the
     environment.  The entry with the name NAME is replaced by the
     value `NAME=VALUE'.  Please note that this is also true if VALUE
     is the empty string.  To do this a new string is created and the
     strings NAME and VALUE are copied.  A null pointer for the VALUE
     parameter is illegal.  If the environment already contains an
     entry with key NAME the REPLACE parameter controls the action.  If
     replace is zero, nothing happens.  Otherwise the old entry is
     replaced by the new one.

     Please note that you cannot remove an entry completely using this
     function.

     If the function is successful it returns `0'.  Otherwise the
     environment is unchanged and the return value is `-1' and `errno'
     is set.

     This function was originally part of the BSD library but is now
     part of the Unix standard.

 -- Function: int unsetenv (const char *NAME)
     Preliminary: | MT-Unsafe const:env | AS-Unsafe lock | AC-Unsafe
     lock | *Note POSIX Safety Concepts::.

     Using this function one can remove an entry completely from the
     environment.  If the environment contains an entry with the key
     NAME this whole entry is removed.  A call to this function is
     equivalent to a call to `putenv' when the VALUE part of the string
     is empty.

     The function return `-1' if NAME is a null pointer, points to an
     empty string, or points to a string containing a `=' character.
     It returns `0' if the call succeeded.

     This function was originally part of the BSD library but is now
     part of the Unix standard.  The BSD version had no return value,
     though.

   There is one more function to modify the whole environment.  This
function is said to be used in the POSIX.9 (POSIX bindings for Fortran
77) and so one should expect it did made it into POSIX.1.  But this
never happened.  But we still provide this function as a GNU extension
to enable writing standard compliant Fortran environments.

 -- Function: int clearenv (void)
     Preliminary: | MT-Unsafe const:env | AS-Unsafe heap lock |
     AC-Unsafe lock mem | *Note POSIX Safety Concepts::.

     The `clearenv' function removes all entries from the environment.
     Using `putenv' and `setenv' new entries can be added again later.

     If the function is successful it returns `0'.  Otherwise the return
     value is nonzero.

   You can deal directly with the underlying representation of
environment objects to add more variables to the environment (for
example, to communicate with another program you are about to execute;
*note Executing a File::).

 -- Variable: char ** environ
     The environment is represented as an array of strings.  Each
     string is of the format `NAME=VALUE'.  The order in which strings
     appear in the environment is not significant, but the same NAME
     must not appear more than once.  The last element of the array is
     a null pointer.

     This variable is declared in the header file `unistd.h'.

     If you just want to get the value of an environment variable, use
     `getenv'.

   Unix systems, and GNU systems, pass the initial value of `environ'
as the third argument to `main'.  *Note Program Arguments::.


File: libc.info,  Node: Standard Environment,  Prev: Environment Access,  Up: Environment Variables

25.4.2 Standard Environment Variables
-------------------------------------

These environment variables have standard meanings.  This doesn't mean
that they are always present in the environment; but if these variables
_are_ present, they have these meanings.  You shouldn't try to use
these environment variable names for some other purpose.

`HOME'
     This is a string representing the user's "home directory", or
     initial default working directory.

     The user can set `HOME' to any value.  If you need to make sure to
     obtain the proper home directory for a particular user, you should
     not use `HOME'; instead, look up the user's name in the user
     database (*note User Database::).

     For most purposes, it is better to use `HOME', precisely because
     this lets the user specify the value.

`LOGNAME'
     This is the name that the user used to log in.  Since the value in
     the environment can be tweaked arbitrarily, this is not a reliable
     way to identify the user who is running a program; a function like
     `getlogin' (*note Who Logged In::) is better for that purpose.

     For most purposes, it is better to use `LOGNAME', precisely because
     this lets the user specify the value.

`PATH'
     A "path" is a sequence of directory names which is used for
     searching for a file.  The variable `PATH' holds a path used for
     searching for programs to be run.

     The `execlp' and `execvp' functions (*note Executing a File::) use
     this environment variable, as do many shells and other utilities
     which are implemented in terms of those functions.

     The syntax of a path is a sequence of directory names separated by
     colons.  An empty string instead of a directory name stands for the
     current directory (*note Working Directory::).

     A typical value for this environment variable might be a string
     like:

          :/bin:/etc:/usr/bin:/usr/new/X11:/usr/new:/usr/local/bin

     This means that if the user tries to execute a program named `foo',
     the system will look for files named `foo', `/bin/foo',
     `/etc/foo', and so on.  The first of these files that exists is
     the one that is executed.

`TERM'
     This specifies the kind of terminal that is receiving program
     output.  Some programs can make use of this information to take
     advantage of special escape sequences or terminal modes supported
     by particular kinds of terminals.  Many programs which use the
     termcap library (*note Find: (termcap)Finding a Terminal
     Description.) use the `TERM' environment variable, for example.

`TZ'
     This specifies the time zone.  *Note TZ Variable::, for
     information about the format of this string and how it is used.

`LANG'
     This specifies the default locale to use for attribute categories
     where neither `LC_ALL' nor the specific environment variable for
     that category is set.  *Note Locales::, for more information about
     locales.

`LC_ALL'
     If this environment variable is set it overrides the selection for
     all the locales done using the other `LC_*' environment variables.
     The value of the other `LC_*' environment variables is simply
     ignored in this case.

`LC_COLLATE'
     This specifies what locale to use for string sorting.

`LC_CTYPE'
     This specifies what locale to use for character sets and character
     classification.

`LC_MESSAGES'
     This specifies what locale to use for printing messages and to
     parse responses.

`LC_MONETARY'
     This specifies what locale to use for formatting monetary values.

`LC_NUMERIC'
     This specifies what locale to use for formatting numbers.

`LC_TIME'
     This specifies what locale to use for formatting date/time values.

`NLSPATH'
     This specifies the directories in which the `catopen' function
     looks for message translation catalogs.

`_POSIX_OPTION_ORDER'
     If this environment variable is defined, it suppresses the usual
     reordering of command line arguments by `getopt' and `argp_parse'.
     *Note Argument Syntax::.



File: libc.info,  Node: Auxiliary Vector,  Next: System Calls,  Prev: Environment Variables,  Up: Program Basics

25.5 Auxiliary Vector
=====================

When a program is executed, it receives information from the operating
system about the environment in which it is operating.  The form of this
information is a table of key-value pairs, where the keys are from the
set of `AT_' values in `elf.h'.  Some of the data is provided by the
kernel for libc consumption, and may be obtained by ordinary
interfaces, such as `sysconf'.  However, on a platform-by-platform
basis there may be information that is not available any other way.

25.5.1 Definition of `getauxval'
--------------------------------

 -- Function: unsigned long int getauxval (unsigned long int TYPE)
     Preliminary: | MT-Safe | AS-Safe | AC-Safe | *Note POSIX Safety
     Concepts::.

     This function is used to inquire about the entries in the auxiliary
     vector.  The TYPE argument should be one of the `AT_' symbols
     defined in `elf.h'.  If a matching entry is found, the value is
     returned; if the entry is not found, zero is returned and `errno'
     is set to `ENOENT'.

   For some platforms, the key `AT_HWCAP' is the easiest way to inquire
about any instruction set extensions available at runtime.  In this
case, there will (of necessity) be a platform-specific set of `HWCAP_'
values masked together that describe the capabilities of the cpu on
which the program is being executed.


File: libc.info,  Node: System Calls,  Next: Program Termination,  Prev: Auxiliary Vector,  Up: Program Basics

25.6 System Calls
=================

A system call is a request for service that a program makes of the
kernel.  The service is generally something that only the kernel has
the privilege to do, such as doing I/O.  Programmers don't normally
need to be concerned with system calls because there are functions in
the GNU C Library to do virtually everything that system calls do.
These functions work by making system calls themselves.  For example,
there is a system call that changes the permissions of a file, but you
don't need to know about it because you can just use the GNU C Library's
`chmod' function.

   System calls are sometimes called kernel calls.

   However, there are times when you want to make a system call
explicitly, and for that, the GNU C Library provides the `syscall'
function.  `syscall' is harder to use and less portable than functions
like `chmod', but easier and more portable than coding the system call
in assembler instructions.

   `syscall' is most useful when you are working with a system call
which is special to your system or is newer than the GNU C Library you
are using.  `syscall' is implemented in an entirely generic way; the
function does not know anything about what a particular system call
does or even if it is valid.

   The description of `syscall' in this section assumes a certain
protocol for system calls on the various platforms on which the GNU C
Library runs.  That protocol is not defined by any strong authority, but
we won't describe it here either because anyone who is coding `syscall'
probably won't accept anything less than kernel and C library source
code as a specification of the interface between them anyway.

   `syscall' is declared in `unistd.h'.

 -- Function: long int syscall (long int SYSNO, ...)
     Preliminary: | MT-Safe | AS-Safe | AC-Safe | *Note POSIX Safety
     Concepts::.

     `syscall' performs a generic system call.

     SYSNO is the system call number.  Each kind of system call is
     identified by a number.  Macros for all the possible system call
     numbers are defined in `sys/syscall.h'

     The remaining arguments are the arguments for the system call, in
     order, and their meanings depend on the kind of system call.  Each
     kind of system call has a definite number of arguments, from zero
     to five.  If you code more arguments than the system call takes,
     the extra ones to the right are ignored.

     The return value is the return value from the system call, unless
     the system call failed.  In that case, `syscall' returns `-1' and
     sets `errno' to an error code that the system call returned.  Note
     that system calls do not return `-1' when they succeed.  

     If you specify an invalid SYSNO, `syscall' returns `-1' with
     `errno' = `ENOSYS'.

     Example:


          #include <unistd.h>
          #include <sys/syscall.h>
          #include <errno.h>

          ...

          int rc;

          rc = syscall(SYS_chmod, "/etc/passwd", 0444);

          if (rc == -1)
             fprintf(stderr, "chmod failed, errno = %d\n", errno);

     This, if all the compatibility stars are aligned, is equivalent to
     the following preferable code:


          #include <sys/types.h>
          #include <sys/stat.h>
          #include <errno.h>

          ...

          int rc;

          rc = chmod("/etc/passwd", 0444);
          if (rc == -1)
             fprintf(stderr, "chmod failed, errno = %d\n", errno);



File: libc.info,  Node: Program Termination,  Prev: System Calls,  Up: Program Basics

25.7 Program Termination
========================

The usual way for a program to terminate is simply for its `main'
function to return.  The "exit status value" returned from the `main'
function is used to report information back to the process's parent
process or shell.

   A program can also terminate normally by calling the `exit' function.

   In addition, programs can be terminated by signals; this is
discussed in more detail in *note Signal Handling::.  The `abort'
function causes a signal that kills the program.

* Menu:

* Normal Termination::          If a program calls `exit', a
                                 process terminates normally.
* Exit Status::                 The `exit status' provides information
                                 about why the process terminated.
* Cleanups on Exit::            A process can run its own cleanup
                                 functions upon normal termination.
* Aborting a Program::          The `abort' function causes
                                 abnormal program termination.
* Termination Internals::       What happens when a process terminates.


File: libc.info,  Node: Normal Termination,  Next: Exit Status,  Up: Program Termination

25.7.1 Normal Termination
-------------------------

A process terminates normally when its program signals it is done by
calling `exit'.  Returning from `main' is equivalent to calling `exit',
and the value that `main' returns is used as the argument to `exit'.

 -- Function: void exit (int STATUS)
     Preliminary: | MT-Unsafe race:exit | AS-Unsafe corrupt | AC-Unsafe
     corrupt lock | *Note POSIX Safety Concepts::.

     The `exit' function tells the system that the program is done,
     which causes it to terminate the process.

     STATUS is the program's exit status, which becomes part of the
     process' termination status.  This function does not return.

   Normal termination causes the following actions:

  1. Functions that were registered with the `atexit' or `on_exit'
     functions are called in the reverse order of their registration.
     This mechanism allows your application to specify its own
     "cleanup" actions to be performed at program termination.
     Typically, this is used to do things like saving program state
     information in a file, or unlocking locks in shared data bases.

  2. All open streams are closed, writing out any buffered output data.
     See *note Closing Streams::.  In addition, temporary files opened
     with the `tmpfile' function are removed; see *note Temporary
     Files::.

  3. `_exit' is called, terminating the program.  *Note Termination
     Internals::.


File: libc.info,  Node: Exit Status,  Next: Cleanups on Exit,  Prev: Normal Termination,  Up: Program Termination

25.7.2 Exit Status
------------------

When a program exits, it can return to the parent process a small
amount of information about the cause of termination, using the "exit
status".  This is a value between 0 and 255 that the exiting process
passes as an argument to `exit'.

   Normally you should use the exit status to report very broad
information about success or failure.  You can't provide a lot of
detail about the reasons for the failure, and most parent processes
would not want much detail anyway.

   There are conventions for what sorts of status values certain
programs should return.  The most common convention is simply 0 for
success and 1 for failure.  Programs that perform comparison use a
different convention: they use status 1 to indicate a mismatch, and
status 2 to indicate an inability to compare.  Your program should
follow an existing convention if an existing convention makes sense for
it.

   A general convention reserves status values 128 and up for special
purposes.  In particular, the value 128 is used to indicate failure to
execute another program in a subprocess.  This convention is not
universally obeyed, but it is a good idea to follow it in your programs.

   *Warning:* Don't try to use the number of errors as the exit status.
This is actually not very useful; a parent process would generally not
care how many errors occurred.  Worse than that, it does not work,
because the status value is truncated to eight bits.  Thus, if the
program tried to report 256 errors, the parent would receive a report
of 0 errors--that is, success.

   For the same reason, it does not work to use the value of `errno' as
the exit status--these can exceed 255.

   *Portability note:* Some non-POSIX systems use different conventions
for exit status values.  For greater portability, you can use the
macros `EXIT_SUCCESS' and `EXIT_FAILURE' for the conventional status
value for success and failure, respectively.  They are declared in the
file `stdlib.h'.  

 -- Macro: int EXIT_SUCCESS
     This macro can be used with the `exit' function to indicate
     successful program completion.

     On POSIX systems, the value of this macro is `0'.  On other
     systems, the value might be some other (possibly non-constant)
     integer expression.

 -- Macro: int EXIT_FAILURE
     This macro can be used with the `exit' function to indicate
     unsuccessful program completion in a general sense.

     On POSIX systems, the value of this macro is `1'.  On other
     systems, the value might be some other (possibly non-constant)
     integer expression.  Other nonzero status values also indicate
     failures.  Certain programs use different nonzero status values to
     indicate particular kinds of "non-success".  For example, `diff'
     uses status value `1' to mean that the files are different, and
     `2' or more to mean that there was difficulty in opening the files.

   Don't confuse a program's exit status with a process' termination
status.  There are lots of ways a process can terminate besides having
its program finish.  In the event that the process termination _is_
caused by program termination (i.e., `exit'), though, the program's
exit status becomes part of the process' termination status.


File: libc.info,  Node: Cleanups on Exit,  Next: Aborting a Program,  Prev: Exit Status,  Up: Program Termination

25.7.3 Cleanups on Exit
-----------------------

Your program can arrange to run its own cleanup functions if normal
termination happens.  If you are writing a library for use in various
application programs, then it is unreliable to insist that all
applications call the library's cleanup functions explicitly before
exiting.  It is much more robust to make the cleanup invisible to the
application, by setting up a cleanup function in the library itself
using `atexit' or `on_exit'.

 -- Function: int atexit (void (*FUNCTION) (void))
     Preliminary: | MT-Safe | AS-Unsafe heap lock | AC-Unsafe lock mem
     | *Note POSIX Safety Concepts::.

     The `atexit' function registers the function FUNCTION to be called
     at normal program termination.  The FUNCTION is called with no
     arguments.

     The return value from `atexit' is zero on success and nonzero if
     the function cannot be registered.

 -- Function: int on_exit (void (*FUNCTION)(int STATUS, void *ARG),
          void *ARG)
     Preliminary: | MT-Safe | AS-Unsafe heap lock | AC-Unsafe lock mem
     | *Note POSIX Safety Concepts::.

     This function is a somewhat more powerful variant of `atexit'.  It
     accepts two arguments, a function FUNCTION and an arbitrary
     pointer ARG.  At normal program termination, the FUNCTION is
     called with two arguments:  the STATUS value passed to `exit', and
     the ARG.

     This function is included in the GNU C Library only for
     compatibility for SunOS, and may not be supported by other
     implementations.

   Here's a trivial program that illustrates the use of `exit' and
`atexit':


     #include <stdio.h>
     #include <stdlib.h>

     void
     bye (void)
     {
       puts ("Goodbye, cruel world....");
     }

     int
     main (void)
     {
       atexit (bye);
       exit (EXIT_SUCCESS);
     }

When this program is executed, it just prints the message and exits.


File: libc.info,  Node: Aborting a Program,  Next: Termination Internals,  Prev: Cleanups on Exit,  Up: Program Termination

25.7.4 Aborting a Program
-------------------------

You can abort your program using the `abort' function.  The prototype
for this function is in `stdlib.h'.  

 -- Function: void abort (void)
     Preliminary: | MT-Safe | AS-Unsafe corrupt | AC-Unsafe lock corrupt
     | *Note POSIX Safety Concepts::.

     The `abort' function causes abnormal program termination.  This
     does not execute cleanup functions registered with `atexit' or
     `on_exit'.

     This function actually terminates the process by raising a
     `SIGABRT' signal, and your program can include a handler to
     intercept this signal; see *note Signal Handling::.

   *Future Change Warning:* Proposed Federal censorship regulations may
prohibit us from giving you information about the possibility of
calling this function.  We would be required to say that this is not an
acceptable way of terminating a program.


File: libc.info,  Node: Termination Internals,  Prev: Aborting a Program,  Up: Program Termination

25.7.5 Termination Internals
----------------------------

The `_exit' function is the primitive used for process termination by
`exit'.  It is declared in the header file `unistd.h'.  

 -- Function: void _exit (int STATUS)
     Preliminary: | MT-Safe | AS-Safe | AC-Safe | *Note POSIX Safety
     Concepts::.

     The `_exit' function is the primitive for causing a process to
     terminate with status STATUS.  Calling this function does not
     execute cleanup functions registered with `atexit' or `on_exit'.

 -- Function: void _Exit (int STATUS)
     Preliminary: | MT-Safe | AS-Safe | AC-Safe | *Note POSIX Safety
     Concepts::.

     The `_Exit' function is the ISO C equivalent to `_exit'.  The
     ISO C committee members were not sure whether the definitions of
     `_exit' and `_Exit' were compatible so they have not used the
     POSIX name.

     This function was introduced in ISO C99 and is declared in
     `stdlib.h'.

   When a process terminates for any reason--either because the program
terminates, or as a result of a signal--the following things happen:

   * All open file descriptors in the process are closed.  *Note
     Low-Level I/O::.  Note that streams are not flushed automatically
     when the process terminates; see *note I/O on Streams::.

   * A process exit status is saved to be reported back to the parent
     process via `wait' or `waitpid'; see *note Process Completion::.
     If the program exited, this status includes as its low-order 8
     bits the program exit status.

   * Any child processes of the process being terminated are assigned a
     new parent process.  (On most systems, including GNU, this is the
     `init' process, with process ID 1.)

   * A `SIGCHLD' signal is sent to the parent process.

   * If the process is a session leader that has a controlling
     terminal, then a `SIGHUP' signal is sent to each process in the
     foreground job, and the controlling terminal is disassociated from
     that session.  *Note Job Control::.

   * If termination of a process causes a process group to become
     orphaned, and any member of that process group is stopped, then a
     `SIGHUP' signal and a `SIGCONT' signal are sent to each process in
     the group.  *Note Job Control::.


File: libc.info,  Node: Processes,  Next: Job Control,  Prev: Program Basics,  Up: Top

26 Processes
************

"Processes" are the primitive units for allocation of system resources.
Each process has its own address space and (usually) one thread of
control.  A process executes a program; you can have multiple processes
executing the same program, but each process has its own copy of the
program within its own address space and executes it independently of
the other copies.

   Processes are organized hierarchically.  Each process has a "parent
process" which explicitly arranged to create it.  The processes created
by a given parent are called its "child processes".  A child inherits
many of its attributes from the parent process.

   This chapter describes how a program can create, terminate, and
control child processes.  Actually, there are three distinct operations
involved: creating a new child process, causing the new process to
execute a program, and coordinating the completion of the child process
with the original program.

   The `system' function provides a simple, portable mechanism for
running another program; it does all three steps automatically.  If you
need more control over the details of how this is done, you can use the
primitive functions to do each step individually instead.

* Menu:

* Running a Command::           The easy way to run another program.
* Process Creation Concepts::   An overview of the hard way to do it.
* Process Identification::      How to get the process ID of a process.
* Creating a Process::          How to fork a child process.
* Executing a File::            How to make a process execute another program.
* Process Completion::          How to tell when a child process has completed.
* Process Completion Status::   How to interpret the status value
                                 returned from a child process.
* BSD Wait Functions::  	More functions, for backward compatibility.
* Process Creation Example::    A complete example program.


File: libc.info,  Node: Running a Command,  Next: Process Creation Concepts,  Up: Processes

26.1 Running a Command
======================

The easy way to run another program is to use the `system' function.
This function does all the work of running a subprogram, but it doesn't
give you much control over the details: you have to wait until the
subprogram terminates before you can do anything else.

 -- Function: int system (const char *COMMAND)
     Preliminary: | MT-Safe | AS-Unsafe plugin heap lock | AC-Unsafe
     lock mem | *Note POSIX Safety Concepts::.

     This function executes COMMAND as a shell command.  In the GNU C
     Library, it always uses the default shell `sh' to run the command.
     In particular, it searches the directories in `PATH' to find
     programs to execute.  The return value is `-1' if it wasn't
     possible to create the shell process, and otherwise is the status
     of the shell process.  *Note Process Completion::, for details on
     how this status code can be interpreted.

     If the COMMAND argument is a null pointer, a return value of zero
     indicates that no command processor is available.

     This function is a cancellation point in multi-threaded programs.
     This is a problem if the thread allocates some resources (like
     memory, file descriptors, semaphores or whatever) at the time
     `system' is called.  If the thread gets canceled these resources
     stay allocated until the program ends.  To avoid this calls to
     `system' should be protected using cancellation handlers.

     The `system' function is declared in the header file `stdlib.h'.

   *Portability Note:* Some C implementations may not have any notion
of a command processor that can execute other programs.  You can
determine whether a command processor exists by executing
`system (NULL)'; if the return value is nonzero, a command processor is
available.

   The `popen' and `pclose' functions (*note Pipe to a Subprocess::)
are closely related to the `system' function.  They allow the parent
process to communicate with the standard input and output channels of
the command being executed.


File: libc.info,  Node: Process Creation Concepts,  Next: Process Identification,  Prev: Running a Command,  Up: Processes

26.2 Process Creation Concepts
==============================

This section gives an overview of processes and of the steps involved in
creating a process and making it run another program.

   Each process is named by a "process ID" number.  A unique process ID
is allocated to each process when it is created.  The "lifetime" of a
process ends when its termination is reported to its parent process; at
that time, all of the process resources, including its process ID, are
freed.

   Processes are created with the `fork' system call (so the operation
of creating a new process is sometimes called "forking" a process).
The "child process" created by `fork' is a copy of the original "parent
process", except that it has its own process ID.

   After forking a child process, both the parent and child processes
continue to execute normally.  If you want your program to wait for a
child process to finish executing before continuing, you must do this
explicitly after the fork operation, by calling `wait' or `waitpid'
(*note Process Completion::).  These functions give you limited
information about why the child terminated--for example, its exit
status code.

   A newly forked child process continues to execute the same program as
its parent process, at the point where the `fork' call returns.  You
can use the return value from `fork' to tell whether the program is
running in the parent process or the child.

   Having several processes run the same program is only occasionally
useful.  But the child can execute another program using one of the
`exec' functions; see *note Executing a File::.  The program that the
process is executing is called its "process image".  Starting execution
of a new program causes the process to forget all about its previous
process image; when the new program exits, the process exits too,
instead of returning to the previous process image.


File: libc.info,  Node: Process Identification,  Next: Creating a Process,  Prev: Process Creation Concepts,  Up: Processes

26.3 Process Identification
===========================

The `pid_t' data type represents process IDs.  You can get the process
ID of a process by calling `getpid'.  The function `getppid' returns
the process ID of the parent of the current process (this is also known
as the "parent process ID").  Your program should include the header
files `unistd.h' and `sys/types.h' to use these functions.  

 -- Data Type: pid_t
     The `pid_t' data type is a signed integer type which is capable of
     representing a process ID.  In the GNU C Library, this is an `int'.

 -- Function: pid_t getpid (void)
     Preliminary: | MT-Safe | AS-Safe | AC-Safe | *Note POSIX Safety
     Concepts::.

     The `getpid' function returns the process ID of the current
     process.

 -- Function: pid_t getppid (void)
     Preliminary: | MT-Safe | AS-Safe | AC-Safe | *Note POSIX Safety
     Concepts::.

     The `getppid' function returns the process ID of the parent of the
     current process.


File: libc.info,  Node: Creating a Process,  Next: Executing a File,  Prev: Process Identification,  Up: Processes

26.4 Creating a Process
=======================

The `fork' function is the primitive for creating a process.  It is
declared in the header file `unistd.h'.  

 -- Function: pid_t fork (void)
     Preliminary: | MT-Safe | AS-Unsafe plugin | AC-Unsafe lock | *Note
     POSIX Safety Concepts::.

     The `fork' function creates a new process.

     If the operation is successful, there are then both parent and
     child processes and both see `fork' return, but with different
     values: it returns a value of `0' in the child process and returns
     the child's process ID in the parent process.

     If process creation failed, `fork' returns a value of `-1' in the
     parent process.  The following `errno' error conditions are
     defined for `fork':

    `EAGAIN'
          There aren't enough system resources to create another
          process, or the user already has too many processes running.
          This means exceeding the `RLIMIT_NPROC' resource limit, which
          can usually be increased; *note Limits on Resources::.

    `ENOMEM'
          The process requires more space than the system can supply.

   The specific attributes of the child process that differ from the
parent process are:

   * The child process has its own unique process ID.

   * The parent process ID of the child process is the process ID of its
     parent process.

   * The child process gets its own copies of the parent process's open
     file descriptors.  Subsequently changing attributes of the file
     descriptors in the parent process won't affect the file
     descriptors in the child, and vice versa.  *Note Control
     Operations::.  However, the file position associated with each
     descriptor is shared by both processes; *note File Position::.

   * The elapsed processor times for the child process are set to zero;
     see *note Processor Time::.

   * The child doesn't inherit file locks set by the parent process.
     *Note Control Operations::.

   * The child doesn't inherit alarms set by the parent process.  *Note
     Setting an Alarm::.

   * The set of pending signals (*note Delivery of Signal::) for the
     child process is cleared.  (The child process inherits its mask of
     blocked signals and signal actions from the parent process.)

 -- Function: pid_t vfork (void)
     Preliminary: | MT-Safe | AS-Unsafe plugin | AC-Unsafe lock | *Note
     POSIX Safety Concepts::.

     The `vfork' function is similar to `fork' but on some systems it
     is more efficient; however, there are restrictions you must follow
     to use it safely.

     While `fork' makes a complete copy of the calling process's address
     space and allows both the parent and child to execute
     independently, `vfork' does not make this copy.  Instead, the
     child process created with `vfork' shares its parent's address
     space until it calls `_exit' or one of the `exec' functions.  In
     the meantime, the parent process suspends execution.

     You must be very careful not to allow the child process created
     with `vfork' to modify any global data or even local variables
     shared with the parent.  Furthermore, the child process cannot
     return from (or do a long jump out of) the function that called
     `vfork'!  This would leave the parent process's control
     information very confused.  If in doubt, use `fork' instead.

     Some operating systems don't really implement `vfork'.  The GNU C
     Library permits you to use `vfork' on all systems, but actually
     executes `fork' if `vfork' isn't available.  If you follow the
     proper precautions for using `vfork', your program will still work
     even if the system uses `fork' instead.


File: libc.info,  Node: Executing a File,  Next: Process Completion,  Prev: Creating a Process,  Up: Processes

26.5 Executing a File
=====================

This section describes the `exec' family of functions, for executing a
file as a process image.  You can use these functions to make a child
process execute a new program after it has been forked.

   To see the effects of `exec' from the point of view of the called
program, see *note Program Basics::.

   The functions in this family differ in how you specify the arguments,
but otherwise they all do the same thing.  They are declared in the
header file `unistd.h'.

 -- Function: int execv (const char *FILENAME, char *const ARGV[])
     Preliminary: | MT-Safe | AS-Safe | AC-Safe | *Note POSIX Safety
     Concepts::.

     The `execv' function executes the file named by FILENAME as a new
     process image.

     The ARGV argument is an array of null-terminated strings that is
     used to provide a value for the `argv' argument to the `main'
     function of the program to be executed.  The last element of this
     array must be a null pointer.  By convention, the first element of
     this array is the file name of the program sans directory names.
     *Note Program Arguments::, for full details on how programs can
     access these arguments.

     The environment for the new process image is taken from the
     `environ' variable of the current process image; see *note
     Environment Variables::, for information about environments.

 -- Function: int execl (const char *FILENAME, const char *ARG0, ...)
     Preliminary: | MT-Safe | AS-Unsafe heap | AC-Unsafe mem | *Note
     POSIX Safety Concepts::.

     This is similar to `execv', but the ARGV strings are specified
     individually instead of as an array.  A null pointer must be
     passed as the last such argument.

 -- Function: int execve (const char *FILENAME, char *const ARGV[],
          char *const ENV[])
     Preliminary: | MT-Safe | AS-Safe | AC-Safe | *Note POSIX Safety
     Concepts::.

     This is similar to `execv', but permits you to specify the
     environment for the new program explicitly as the ENV argument.
     This should be an array of strings in the same format as for the
     `environ' variable; see *note Environment Access::.

 -- Function: int execle (const char *FILENAME, const char *ARG0, ...,
          char *const ENV[])
     Preliminary: | MT-Safe | AS-Unsafe heap | AC-Unsafe mem | *Note
     POSIX Safety Concepts::.

     This is similar to `execl', but permits you to specify the
     environment for the new program explicitly.  The environment
     argument is passed following the null pointer that marks the last
     ARGV argument, and should be an array of strings in the same
     format as for the `environ' variable.

 -- Function: int execvp (const char *FILENAME, char *const ARGV[])
     Preliminary: | MT-Safe env | AS-Unsafe heap | AC-Unsafe mem |
     *Note POSIX Safety Concepts::.

     The `execvp' function is similar to `execv', except that it
     searches the directories listed in the `PATH' environment variable
     (*note Standard Environment::) to find the full file name of a
     file from FILENAME if FILENAME does not contain a slash.

     This function is useful for executing system utility programs,
     because it looks for them in the places that the user has chosen.
     Shells use it to run the commands that users type.

 -- Function: int execlp (const char *FILENAME, const char *ARG0, ...)
     Preliminary: | MT-Safe env | AS-Unsafe heap | AC-Unsafe mem |
     *Note POSIX Safety Concepts::.

     This function is like `execl', except that it performs the same
     file name searching as the `execvp' function.

   The size of the argument list and environment list taken together
must not be greater than `ARG_MAX' bytes.  *Note General Limits::.  On
GNU/Hurd systems, the size (which compares against `ARG_MAX') includes,
for each string, the number of characters in the string, plus the size
of a `char *', plus one, rounded up to a multiple of the size of a
`char *'.  Other systems may have somewhat different rules for counting.

   These functions normally don't return, since execution of a new
program causes the currently executing program to go away completely.
A value of `-1' is returned in the event of a failure.  In addition to
the usual file name errors (*note File Name Errors::), the following
`errno' error conditions are defined for these functions:

`E2BIG'
     The combined size of the new program's argument list and
     environment list is larger than `ARG_MAX' bytes.  GNU/Hurd systems
     have no specific limit on the argument list size, so this error
     code cannot result, but you may get `ENOMEM' instead if the
     arguments are too big for available memory.

`ENOEXEC'
     The specified file can't be executed because it isn't in the right
     format.

`ENOMEM'
     Executing the specified file requires more storage than is
     available.

   If execution of the new file succeeds, it updates the access time
field of the file as if the file had been read.  *Note File Times::,
for more details about access times of files.

   The point at which the file is closed again is not specified, but is
at some point before the process exits or before another process image
is executed.

   Executing a new process image completely changes the contents of
memory, copying only the argument and environment strings to new
locations.  But many other attributes of the process are unchanged:

   * The process ID and the parent process ID.  *Note Process Creation
     Concepts::.

   * Session and process group membership.  *Note Concepts of Job
     Control::.

   * Real user ID and group ID, and supplementary group IDs.  *Note
     Process Persona::.

   * Pending alarms.  *Note Setting an Alarm::.

   * Current working directory and root directory.  *Note Working
     Directory::.  On GNU/Hurd systems, the root directory is not
     copied when executing a setuid program; instead the system default
     root directory is used for the new program.

   * File mode creation mask.  *Note Setting Permissions::.

   * Process signal mask; see *note Process Signal Mask::.

   * Pending signals; see *note Blocking Signals::.

   * Elapsed processor time associated with the process; see *note
     Processor Time::.

   If the set-user-ID and set-group-ID mode bits of the process image
file are set, this affects the effective user ID and effective group ID
(respectively) of the process.  These concepts are discussed in detail
in *note Process Persona::.

   Signals that are set to be ignored in the existing process image are
also set to be ignored in the new process image.  All other signals are
set to the default action in the new process image.  For more
information about signals, see *note Signal Handling::.

   File descriptors open in the existing process image remain open in
the new process image, unless they have the `FD_CLOEXEC'
(close-on-exec) flag set.  The files that remain open inherit all
attributes of the open file description from the existing process image,
including file locks.  File descriptors are discussed in *note
Low-Level I/O::.

   Streams, by contrast, cannot survive through `exec' functions,
because they are located in the memory of the process itself.  The new
process image has no streams except those it creates afresh.  Each of
the streams in the pre-`exec' process image has a descriptor inside it,
and these descriptors do survive through `exec' (provided that they do
not have `FD_CLOEXEC' set).  The new process image can reconnect these
to new streams using `fdopen' (*note Descriptors and Streams::).


File: libc.info,  Node: Process Completion,  Next: Process Completion Status,  Prev: Executing a File,  Up: Processes

26.6 Process Completion
=======================

The functions described in this section are used to wait for a child
process to terminate or stop, and determine its status.  These functions
are declared in the header file `sys/wait.h'.  

 -- Function: pid_t waitpid (pid_t PID, int *STATUS-PTR, int OPTIONS)
     Preliminary: | MT-Safe | AS-Safe | AC-Safe | *Note POSIX Safety
     Concepts::.

     The `waitpid' function is used to request status information from a
     child process whose process ID is PID.  Normally, the calling
     process is suspended until the child process makes status
     information available by terminating.

     Other values for the PID argument have special interpretations.  A
     value of `-1' or `WAIT_ANY' requests status information for any
     child process; a value of `0' or `WAIT_MYPGRP' requests
     information for any child process in the same process group as the
     calling process; and any other negative value - PGID requests
     information for any child process whose process group ID is PGID.

     If status information for a child process is available
     immediately, this function returns immediately without waiting.
     If more than one eligible child process has status information
     available, one of them is chosen randomly, and its status is
     returned immediately.  To get the status from the other eligible
     child processes, you need to call `waitpid' again.

     The OPTIONS argument is a bit mask.  Its value should be the
     bitwise OR (that is, the `|' operator) of zero or more of the
     `WNOHANG' and `WUNTRACED' flags.  You can use the `WNOHANG' flag
     to indicate that the parent process shouldn't wait; and the
     `WUNTRACED' flag to request status information from stopped
     processes as well as processes that have terminated.

     The status information from the child process is stored in the
     object that STATUS-PTR points to, unless STATUS-PTR is a null
     pointer.

     This function is a cancellation point in multi-threaded programs.
     This is a problem if the thread allocates some resources (like
     memory, file descriptors, semaphores or whatever) at the time
     `waitpid' is called.  If the thread gets canceled these resources
     stay allocated until the program ends.  To avoid this calls to
     `waitpid' should be protected using cancellation handlers.

     The return value is normally the process ID of the child process
     whose status is reported.  If there are child processes but none
     of them is waiting to be noticed, `waitpid' will block until one
     is.  However, if the `WNOHANG' option was specified, `waitpid'
     will return zero instead of blocking.

     If a specific PID to wait for was given to `waitpid', it will
     ignore all other children (if any).  Therefore if there are
     children waiting to be noticed but the child whose PID was
     specified is not one of them, `waitpid' will block or return zero
     as described above.

     A value of `-1' is returned in case of error.  The following
     `errno' error conditions are defined for this function:

    `EINTR'
          The function was interrupted by delivery of a signal to the
          calling process.  *Note Interrupted Primitives::.

    `ECHILD'
          There are no child processes to wait for, or the specified PID
          is not a child of the calling process.

    `EINVAL'
          An invalid value was provided for the OPTIONS argument.

   These symbolic constants are defined as values for the PID argument
to the `waitpid' function.

`WAIT_ANY'
     This constant macro (whose value is `-1') specifies that `waitpid'
     should return status information about any child process.

`WAIT_MYPGRP'
     This constant (with value `0') specifies that `waitpid' should
     return status information about any child process in the same
     process group as the calling process.

   These symbolic constants are defined as flags for the OPTIONS
argument to the `waitpid' function.  You can bitwise-OR the flags
together to obtain a value to use as the argument.

`WNOHANG'
     This flag specifies that `waitpid' should return immediately
     instead of waiting, if there is no child process ready to be
     noticed.

`WUNTRACED'
     This flag specifies that `waitpid' should report the status of any
     child processes that have been stopped as well as those that have
     terminated.

 -- Function: pid_t wait (int *STATUS-PTR)
     Preliminary: | MT-Safe | AS-Safe | AC-Safe | *Note POSIX Safety
     Concepts::.

     This is a simplified version of `waitpid', and is used to wait
     until any one child process terminates.  The call:

          wait (&status)

     is exactly equivalent to:

          waitpid (-1, &status, 0)

     This function is a cancellation point in multi-threaded programs.
     This is a problem if the thread allocates some resources (like
     memory, file descriptors, semaphores or whatever) at the time
     `wait' is called.  If the thread gets canceled these resources
     stay allocated until the program ends.  To avoid this calls to
     `wait' should be protected using cancellation handlers.

 -- Function: pid_t wait4 (pid_t PID, int *STATUS-PTR, int OPTIONS,
          struct rusage *USAGE)
     Preliminary: | MT-Safe | AS-Safe | AC-Safe | *Note POSIX Safety
     Concepts::.

     If USAGE is a null pointer, `wait4' is equivalent to `waitpid
     (PID, STATUS-PTR, OPTIONS)'.

     If USAGE is not null, `wait4' stores usage figures for the child
     process in `*RUSAGE' (but only if the child has terminated, not if
     it has stopped).  *Note Resource Usage::.

     This function is a BSD extension.

   Here's an example of how to use `waitpid' to get the status from all
child processes that have terminated, without ever waiting.  This
function is designed to be a handler for `SIGCHLD', the signal that
indicates that at least one child process has terminated.

     void
     sigchld_handler (int signum)
     {
       int pid, status, serrno;
       serrno = errno;
       while (1)
         {
           pid = waitpid (WAIT_ANY, &status, WNOHANG);
           if (pid < 0)
             {
               perror ("waitpid");
               break;
             }
           if (pid == 0)
             break;
           notice_termination (pid, status);
         }
       errno = serrno;
     }


File: libc.info,  Node: Process Completion Status,  Next: BSD Wait Functions,  Prev: Process Completion,  Up: Processes

26.7 Process Completion Status
==============================

If the exit status value (*note Program Termination::) of the child
process is zero, then the status value reported by `waitpid' or `wait'
is also zero.  You can test for other kinds of information encoded in
the returned status value using the following macros.  These macros are
defined in the header file `sys/wait.h'.  

 -- Macro: int WIFEXITED (int STATUS)
     Preliminary: | MT-Safe | AS-Safe | AC-Safe | *Note POSIX Safety
     Concepts::.

     This macro returns a nonzero value if the child process terminated
     normally with `exit' or `_exit'.

 -- Macro: int WEXITSTATUS (int STATUS)
     Preliminary: | MT-Safe | AS-Safe | AC-Safe | *Note POSIX Safety
     Concepts::.

     If `WIFEXITED' is true of STATUS, this macro returns the low-order
     8 bits of the exit status value from the child process.  *Note
     Exit Status::.

 -- Macro: int WIFSIGNALED (int STATUS)
     Preliminary: | MT-Safe | AS-Safe | AC-Safe | *Note POSIX Safety
     Concepts::.

     This macro returns a nonzero value if the child process terminated
     because it received a signal that was not handled.  *Note Signal
     Handling::.

 -- Macro: int WTERMSIG (int STATUS)
     Preliminary: | MT-Safe | AS-Safe | AC-Safe | *Note POSIX Safety
     Concepts::.

     If `WIFSIGNALED' is true of STATUS, this macro returns the signal
     number of the signal that terminated the child process.

 -- Macro: int WCOREDUMP (int STATUS)
     Preliminary: | MT-Safe | AS-Safe | AC-Safe | *Note POSIX Safety
     Concepts::.

     This macro returns a nonzero value if the child process terminated
     and produced a core dump.

 -- Macro: int WIFSTOPPED (int STATUS)
     Preliminary: | MT-Safe | AS-Safe | AC-Safe | *Note POSIX Safety
     Concepts::.

     This macro returns a nonzero value if the child process is stopped.

 -- Macro: int WSTOPSIG (int STATUS)
     Preliminary: | MT-Safe | AS-Safe | AC-Safe | *Note POSIX Safety
     Concepts::.

     If `WIFSTOPPED' is true of STATUS, this macro returns the signal
     number of the signal that caused the child process to stop.


File: libc.info,  Node: BSD Wait Functions,  Next: Process Creation Example,  Prev: Process Completion Status,  Up: Processes

26.8 BSD Process Wait Functions
===============================

The GNU C Library also provides these related facilities for
compatibility with BSD Unix.  BSD uses the `union wait' data type to
represent status values rather than an `int'.  The two representations
are actually interchangeable; they describe the same bit patterns.  The
GNU C Library defines macros such as `WEXITSTATUS' so that they will
work on either kind of object, and the `wait' function is defined to
accept either type of pointer as its STATUS-PTR argument.

   These functions are declared in `sys/wait.h'.  

 -- Data Type: union wait
     This data type represents program termination status values.  It
     has the following members:

    `int w_termsig'
          The value of this member is the same as that of the
          `WTERMSIG' macro.

    `int w_coredump'
          The value of this member is the same as that of the
          `WCOREDUMP' macro.

    `int w_retcode'
          The value of this member is the same as that of the
          `WEXITSTATUS' macro.

    `int w_stopsig'
          The value of this member is the same as that of the
          `WSTOPSIG' macro.

     Instead of accessing these members directly, you should use the
     equivalent macros.

   The `wait3' function is the predecessor to `wait4', which is more
flexible.  `wait3' is now obsolete.

 -- Function: pid_t wait3 (union wait *STATUS-PTR, int OPTIONS, struct
          rusage *USAGE)
     Preliminary: | MT-Safe | AS-Safe | AC-Safe | *Note POSIX Safety
     Concepts::.

     If USAGE is a null pointer, `wait3' is equivalent to `waitpid (-1,
     STATUS-PTR, OPTIONS)'.

     If USAGE is not null, `wait3' stores usage figures for the child
     process in `*RUSAGE' (but only if the child has terminated, not if
     it has stopped).  *Note Resource Usage::.


File: libc.info,  Node: Process Creation Example,  Prev: BSD Wait Functions,  Up: Processes

26.9 Process Creation Example
=============================

Here is an example program showing how you might write a function
similar to the built-in `system'.  It executes its COMMAND argument
using the equivalent of `sh -c COMMAND'.

     #include <stddef.h>
     #include <stdlib.h>
     #include <unistd.h>
     #include <sys/types.h>
     #include <sys/wait.h>

     /* Execute the command using this shell program.  */
     #define SHELL "/bin/sh"

     int
     my_system (const char *command)
     {
       int status;
       pid_t pid;

       pid = fork ();
       if (pid == 0)
         {
           /* This is the child process.  Execute the shell command. */
           execl (SHELL, SHELL, "-c", command, NULL);
           _exit (EXIT_FAILURE);
         }
       else if (pid < 0)
         /* The fork failed.  Report failure.  */
         status = -1;
       else
         /* This is the parent process.  Wait for the child to complete.  */
         if (waitpid (pid, &status, 0) != pid)
           status = -1;
       return status;
     }

   There are a couple of things you should pay attention to in this
example.

   Remember that the first `argv' argument supplied to the program
represents the name of the program being executed.  That is why, in the
call to `execl', `SHELL' is supplied once to name the program to
execute and a second time to supply a value for `argv[0]'.

   The `execl' call in the child process doesn't return if it is
successful.  If it fails, you must do something to make the child
process terminate.  Just returning a bad status code with `return'
would leave two processes running the original program.  Instead, the
right behavior is for the child process to report failure to its parent
process.

   Call `_exit' to accomplish this.  The reason for using `_exit'
instead of `exit' is to avoid flushing fully buffered streams such as
`stdout'.  The buffers of these streams probably contain data that was
copied from the parent process by the `fork', data that will be output
eventually by the parent process.  Calling `exit' in the child would
output the data twice.  *Note Termination Internals::.


File: libc.info,  Node: Job Control,  Next: Name Service Switch,  Prev: Processes,  Up: Top

27 Job Control
**************

"Job control" refers to the protocol for allowing a user to move
between multiple "process groups" (or "jobs") within a single "login
session".  The job control facilities are set up so that appropriate
behavior for most programs happens automatically and they need not do
anything special about job control.  So you can probably ignore the
material in this chapter unless you are writing a shell or login
program.

   You need to be familiar with concepts relating to process creation
(*note Process Creation Concepts::) and signal handling (*note Signal
Handling::) in order to understand this material presented in this
chapter.

* Menu:

* Concepts of Job Control::     Jobs can be controlled by a shell.
* Job Control is Optional::     Not all POSIX systems support job control.
* Controlling Terminal::        How a process gets its controlling terminal.
* Access to the Terminal::      How processes share the controlling terminal.
* Orphaned Process Groups::     Jobs left after the user logs out.
* Implementing a Shell::        What a shell must do to implement job control.
* Functions for Job Control::   Functions to control process groups.


File: libc.info,  Node: Concepts of Job Control,  Next: Job Control is Optional,  Up: Job Control

27.1 Concepts of Job Control
============================

The fundamental purpose of an interactive shell is to read commands
from the user's terminal and create processes to execute the programs
specified by those commands.  It can do this using the `fork' (*note
Creating a Process::) and `exec' (*note Executing a File::) functions.

   A single command may run just one process--but often one command uses
several processes.  If you use the `|' operator in a shell command, you
explicitly request several programs in their own processes.  But even
if you run just one program, it can use multiple processes internally.
For example, a single compilation command such as `cc -c foo.c'
typically uses four processes (though normally only two at any given
time).  If you run `make', its job is to run other programs in separate
processes.

   The processes belonging to a single command are called a "process
group" or "job".  This is so that you can operate on all of them at
once.  For example, typing `C-c' sends the signal `SIGINT' to terminate
all the processes in the foreground process group.

   A "session" is a larger group of processes.  Normally all the
processes that stem from a single login belong to the same session.

   Every process belongs to a process group.  When a process is
created, it becomes a member of the same process group and session as
its parent process.  You can put it in another process group using the
`setpgid' function, provided the process group belongs to the same
session.

   The only way to put a process in a different session is to make it
the initial process of a new session, or a "session leader", using the
`setsid' function.  This also puts the session leader into a new
process group, and you can't move it out of that process group again.

   Usually, new sessions are created by the system login program, and
the session leader is the process running the user's login shell.

   A shell that supports job control must arrange to control which job
can use the terminal at any time.  Otherwise there might be multiple
jobs trying to read from the terminal at once, and confusion about which
process should receive the input typed by the user.  To prevent this,
the shell must cooperate with the terminal driver using the protocol
described in this chapter.

   The shell can give unlimited access to the controlling terminal to
only one process group at a time.  This is called the "foreground job"
on that controlling terminal.  Other process groups managed by the shell
that are executing without such access to the terminal are called
"background jobs".

   If a background job needs to read from its controlling terminal, it
is "stopped" by the terminal driver; if the `TOSTOP' mode is set,
likewise for writing.  The user can stop a foreground job by typing the
SUSP character (*note Special Characters::) and a program can stop any
job by sending it a `SIGSTOP' signal.  It's the responsibility of the
shell to notice when jobs stop, to notify the user about them, and to
provide mechanisms for allowing the user to interactively continue
stopped jobs and switch jobs between foreground and background.

   *Note Access to the Terminal::, for more information about I/O to the
controlling terminal,


File: libc.info,  Node: Job Control is Optional,  Next: Controlling Terminal,  Prev: Concepts of Job Control,  Up: Job Control

27.2 Job Control is Optional
============================

Not all operating systems support job control.  GNU systems do support
job control, but if you are using the GNU C Library on some other
system, that system may not support job control itself.

   You can use the `_POSIX_JOB_CONTROL' macro to test at compile-time
whether the system supports job control.  *Note System Options::.

   If job control is not supported, then there can be only one process
group per session, which behaves as if it were always in the foreground.
The functions for creating additional process groups simply fail with
the error code `ENOSYS'.

   The macros naming the various job control signals (*note Job Control
Signals::) are defined even if job control is not supported.  However,
the system never generates these signals, and attempts to send a job
control signal or examine or specify their actions report errors or do
nothing.


File: libc.info,  Node: Controlling Terminal,  Next: Access to the Terminal,  Prev: Job Control is Optional,  Up: Job Control

27.3 Controlling Terminal of a Process
======================================

One of the attributes of a process is its controlling terminal.  Child
processes created with `fork' inherit the controlling terminal from
their parent process.  In this way, all the processes in a session
inherit the controlling terminal from the session leader.  A session
leader that has control of a terminal is called the "controlling
process" of that terminal.

   You generally do not need to worry about the exact mechanism used to
allocate a controlling terminal to a session, since it is done for you
by the system when you log in.

   An individual process disconnects from its controlling terminal when
it calls `setsid' to become the leader of a new session.  *Note Process
Group Functions::.


File: libc.info,  Node: Access to the Terminal,  Next: Orphaned Process Groups,  Prev: Controlling Terminal,  Up: Job Control

27.4 Access to the Controlling Terminal
=======================================

Processes in the foreground job of a controlling terminal have
unrestricted access to that terminal; background processes do not.  This
section describes in more detail what happens when a process in a
background job tries to access its controlling terminal.

   When a process in a background job tries to read from its controlling
terminal, the process group is usually sent a `SIGTTIN' signal.  This
normally causes all of the processes in that group to stop (unless they
handle the signal and don't stop themselves).  However, if the reading
process is ignoring or blocking this signal, then `read' fails with an
`EIO' error instead.

   Similarly, when a process in a background job tries to write to its
controlling terminal, the default behavior is to send a `SIGTTOU'
signal to the process group.  However, the behavior is modified by the
`TOSTOP' bit of the local modes flags (*note Local Modes::).  If this
bit is not set (which is the default), then writing to the controlling
terminal is always permitted without sending a signal.  Writing is also
permitted if the `SIGTTOU' signal is being ignored or blocked by the
writing process.

   Most other terminal operations that a program can do are treated as
reading or as writing.  (The description of each operation should say
which.)

   For more information about the primitive `read' and `write'
functions, see *note I/O Primitives::.


File: libc.info,  Node: Orphaned Process Groups,  Next: Implementing a Shell,  Prev: Access to the Terminal,  Up: Job Control

27.5 Orphaned Process Groups
============================

When a controlling process terminates, its terminal becomes free and a
new session can be established on it.  (In fact, another user could log
in on the terminal.)  This could cause a problem if any processes from
the old session are still trying to use that terminal.

   To prevent problems, process groups that continue running even after
the session leader has terminated are marked as "orphaned process
groups".

   When a process group becomes an orphan, its processes are sent a
`SIGHUP' signal.  Ordinarily, this causes the processes to terminate.
However, if a program ignores this signal or establishes a handler for
it (*note Signal Handling::), it can continue running as in the orphan
process group even after its controlling process terminates; but it
still cannot access the terminal any more.


File: libc.info,  Node: Implementing a Shell,  Next: Functions for Job Control,  Prev: Orphaned Process Groups,  Up: Job Control

27.6 Implementing a Job Control Shell
=====================================

This section describes what a shell must do to implement job control, by
presenting an extensive sample program to illustrate the concepts
involved.

* Menu:

* Data Structures::             Introduction to the sample shell.
* Initializing the Shell::      What the shell must do to take
				 responsibility for job control.
* Launching Jobs::              Creating jobs to execute commands.
* Foreground and Background::   Putting a job in foreground of background.
* Stopped and Terminated Jobs::  Reporting job status.
* Continuing Stopped Jobs::     How to continue a stopped job in
				 the foreground or background.
* Missing Pieces::              Other parts of the shell.


File: libc.info,  Node: Data Structures,  Next: Initializing the Shell,  Up: Implementing a Shell

27.6.1 Data Structures for the Shell
------------------------------------

All of the program examples included in this chapter are part of a
simple shell program.  This section presents data structures and
utility functions which are used throughout the example.

   The sample shell deals mainly with two data structures.  The `job'
type contains information about a job, which is a set of subprocesses
linked together with pipes.  The `process' type holds information about
a single subprocess.  Here are the relevant data structure declarations:

     /* A process is a single process.  */
     typedef struct process
     {
       struct process *next;       /* next process in pipeline */
       char **argv;                /* for exec */
       pid_t pid;                  /* process ID */
       char completed;             /* true if process has completed */
       char stopped;               /* true if process has stopped */
       int status;                 /* reported status value */
     } process;

     /* A job is a pipeline of processes.  */
     typedef struct job
     {
       struct job *next;           /* next active job */
       char *command;              /* command line, used for messages */
       process *first_process;     /* list of processes in this job */
       pid_t pgid;                 /* process group ID */
       char notified;              /* true if user told about stopped job */
       struct termios tmodes;      /* saved terminal modes */
       int stdin, stdout, stderr;  /* standard i/o channels */
     } job;

     /* The active jobs are linked into a list.  This is its head.   */
     job *first_job = NULL;

   Here are some utility functions that are used for operating on `job'
objects.

     /* Find the active job with the indicated PGID.  */
     job *
     find_job (pid_t pgid)
     {
       job *j;

       for (j = first_job; j; j = j->next)
         if (j->pgid == pgid)
           return j;
       return NULL;
     }

     /* Return true if all processes in the job have stopped or completed.  */
     int
     job_is_stopped (job *j)
     {
       process *p;

       for (p = j->first_process; p; p = p->next)
         if (!p->completed && !p->stopped)
           return 0;
       return 1;
     }

     /* Return true if all processes in the job have completed.  */
     int
     job_is_completed (job *j)
     {
       process *p;

       for (p = j->first_process; p; p = p->next)
         if (!p->completed)
           return 0;
       return 1;
     }


File: libc.info,  Node: Initializing the Shell,  Next: Launching Jobs,  Prev: Data Structures,  Up: Implementing a Shell

27.6.2 Initializing the Shell
-----------------------------

When a shell program that normally performs job control is started, it
has to be careful in case it has been invoked from another shell that is
already doing its own job control.

   A subshell that runs interactively has to ensure that it has been
placed in the foreground by its parent shell before it can enable job
control itself.  It does this by getting its initial process group ID
with the `getpgrp' function, and comparing it to the process group ID
of the current foreground job associated with its controlling terminal
(which can be retrieved using the `tcgetpgrp' function).

   If the subshell is not running as a foreground job, it must stop
itself by sending a `SIGTTIN' signal to its own process group.  It may
not arbitrarily put itself into the foreground; it must wait for the
user to tell the parent shell to do this.  If the subshell is continued
again, it should repeat the check and stop itself again if it is still
not in the foreground.

   Once the subshell has been placed into the foreground by its parent
shell, it can enable its own job control.  It does this by calling
`setpgid' to put itself into its own process group, and then calling
`tcsetpgrp' to place this process group into the foreground.

   When a shell enables job control, it should set itself to ignore all
the job control stop signals so that it doesn't accidentally stop
itself.  You can do this by setting the action for all the stop signals
to `SIG_IGN'.

   A subshell that runs non-interactively cannot and should not support
job control.  It must leave all processes it creates in the same process
group as the shell itself; this allows the non-interactive shell and its
child processes to be treated as a single job by the parent shell.  This
is easy to do--just don't use any of the job control primitives--but
you must remember to make the shell do it.

   Here is the initialization code for the sample shell that shows how
to do all of this.

     /* Keep track of attributes of the shell.  */

     #include <sys/types.h>
     #include <termios.h>
     #include <unistd.h>

     pid_t shell_pgid;
     struct termios shell_tmodes;
     int shell_terminal;
     int shell_is_interactive;


     /* Make sure the shell is running interactively as the foreground job
        before proceeding. */

     void
     init_shell ()
     {

       /* See if we are running interactively.  */
       shell_terminal = STDIN_FILENO;
       shell_is_interactive = isatty (shell_terminal);

       if (shell_is_interactive)
         {
           /* Loop until we are in the foreground.  */
           while (tcgetpgrp (shell_terminal) != (shell_pgid = getpgrp ()))
             kill (- shell_pgid, SIGTTIN);

           /* Ignore interactive and job-control signals.  */
           signal (SIGINT, SIG_IGN);
           signal (SIGQUIT, SIG_IGN);
           signal (SIGTSTP, SIG_IGN);
           signal (SIGTTIN, SIG_IGN);
           signal (SIGTTOU, SIG_IGN);
           signal (SIGCHLD, SIG_IGN);

           /* Put ourselves in our own process group.  */
           shell_pgid = getpid ();
           if (setpgid (shell_pgid, shell_pgid) < 0)
             {
               perror ("Couldn't put the shell in its own process group");
               exit (1);
             }

           /* Grab control of the terminal.  */
           tcsetpgrp (shell_terminal, shell_pgid);

           /* Save default terminal attributes for shell.  */
           tcgetattr (shell_terminal, &shell_tmodes);
         }
     }


File: libc.info,  Node: Launching Jobs,  Next: Foreground and Background,  Prev: Initializing the Shell,  Up: Implementing a Shell

27.6.3 Launching Jobs
---------------------

Once the shell has taken responsibility for performing job control on
its controlling terminal, it can launch jobs in response to commands
typed by the user.

   To create the processes in a process group, you use the same `fork'
and `exec' functions described in *note Process Creation Concepts::.
Since there are multiple child processes involved, though, things are a
little more complicated and you must be careful to do things in the
right order.  Otherwise, nasty race conditions can result.

   You have two choices for how to structure the tree of parent-child
relationships among the processes.  You can either make all the
processes in the process group be children of the shell process, or you
can make one process in group be the ancestor of all the other processes
in that group.  The sample shell program presented in this chapter uses
the first approach because it makes bookkeeping somewhat simpler.

   As each process is forked, it should put itself in the new process
group by calling `setpgid'; see *note Process Group Functions::.  The
first process in the new group becomes its "process group leader", and
its process ID becomes the "process group ID" for the group.

   The shell should also call `setpgid' to put each of its child
processes into the new process group.  This is because there is a
potential timing problem: each child process must be put in the process
group before it begins executing a new program, and the shell depends on
having all the child processes in the group before it continues
executing.  If both the child processes and the shell call `setpgid',
this ensures that the right things happen no matter which process gets
to it first.

   If the job is being launched as a foreground job, the new process
group also needs to be put into the foreground on the controlling
terminal using `tcsetpgrp'.  Again, this should be done by the shell as
well as by each of its child processes, to avoid race conditions.

   The next thing each child process should do is to reset its signal
actions.

   During initialization, the shell process set itself to ignore job
control signals; see *note Initializing the Shell::.  As a result, any
child processes it creates also ignore these signals by inheritance.
This is definitely undesirable, so each child process should explicitly
set the actions for these signals back to `SIG_DFL' just after it is
forked.

   Since shells follow this convention, applications can assume that
they inherit the correct handling of these signals from the parent
process.  But every application has a responsibility not to mess up the
handling of stop signals.  Applications that disable the normal
interpretation of the SUSP character should provide some other
mechanism for the user to stop the job.  When the user invokes this
mechanism, the program should send a `SIGTSTP' signal to the process
group of the process, not just to the process itself.  *Note Signaling
Another Process::.

   Finally, each child process should call `exec' in the normal way.
This is also the point at which redirection of the standard input and
output channels should be handled.  *Note Duplicating Descriptors::,
for an explanation of how to do this.

   Here is the function from the sample shell program that is
responsible for launching a program.  The function is executed by each
child process immediately after it has been forked by the shell, and
never returns.

     void
     launch_process (process *p, pid_t pgid,
                     int infile, int outfile, int errfile,
                     int foreground)
     {
       pid_t pid;

       if (shell_is_interactive)
         {
           /* Put the process into the process group and give the process group
              the terminal, if appropriate.
              This has to be done both by the shell and in the individual
              child processes because of potential race conditions.  */
           pid = getpid ();
           if (pgid == 0) pgid = pid;
           setpgid (pid, pgid);
           if (foreground)
             tcsetpgrp (shell_terminal, pgid);

           /* Set the handling for job control signals back to the default.  */
           signal (SIGINT, SIG_DFL);
           signal (SIGQUIT, SIG_DFL);
           signal (SIGTSTP, SIG_DFL);
           signal (SIGTTIN, SIG_DFL);
           signal (SIGTTOU, SIG_DFL);
           signal (SIGCHLD, SIG_DFL);
         }

       /* Set the standard input/output channels of the new process.  */
       if (infile != STDIN_FILENO)
         {
           dup2 (infile, STDIN_FILENO);
           close (infile);
         }
       if (outfile != STDOUT_FILENO)
         {
           dup2 (outfile, STDOUT_FILENO);
           close (outfile);
         }
       if (errfile != STDERR_FILENO)
         {
           dup2 (errfile, STDERR_FILENO);
           close (errfile);
         }

       /* Exec the new process.  Make sure we exit.  */
       execvp (p->argv[0], p->argv);
       perror ("execvp");
       exit (1);
     }

   If the shell is not running interactively, this function does not do
anything with process groups or signals.  Remember that a shell not
performing job control must keep all of its subprocesses in the same
process group as the shell itself.

   Next, here is the function that actually launches a complete job.
After creating the child processes, this function calls some other
functions to put the newly created job into the foreground or
background; these are discussed in *note Foreground and Background::.

     void
     launch_job (job *j, int foreground)
     {
       process *p;
       pid_t pid;
       int mypipe[2], infile, outfile;

       infile = j->stdin;
       for (p = j->first_process; p; p = p->next)
         {
           /* Set up pipes, if necessary.  */
           if (p->next)
             {
               if (pipe (mypipe) < 0)
                 {
                   perror ("pipe");
                   exit (1);
                 }
               outfile = mypipe[1];
             }
           else
             outfile = j->stdout;

           /* Fork the child processes.  */
           pid = fork ();
           if (pid == 0)
             /* This is the child process.  */
             launch_process (p, j->pgid, infile,
                             outfile, j->stderr, foreground);
           else if (pid < 0)
             {
               /* The fork failed.  */
               perror ("fork");
               exit (1);
             }
           else
             {
               /* This is the parent process.  */
               p->pid = pid;
               if (shell_is_interactive)
                 {
                   if (!j->pgid)
                     j->pgid = pid;
                   setpgid (pid, j->pgid);
                 }
             }

           /* Clean up after pipes.  */
           if (infile != j->stdin)
             close (infile);
           if (outfile != j->stdout)
             close (outfile);
           infile = mypipe[0];
         }

       format_job_info (j, "launched");

       if (!shell_is_interactive)
         wait_for_job (j);
       else if (foreground)
         put_job_in_foreground (j, 0);
       else
         put_job_in_background (j, 0);
     }


File: libc.info,  Node: Foreground and Background,  Next: Stopped and Terminated Jobs,  Prev: Launching Jobs,  Up: Implementing a Shell

27.6.4 Foreground and Background
--------------------------------

Now let's consider what actions must be taken by the shell when it
launches a job into the foreground, and how this differs from what must
be done when a background job is launched.

   When a foreground job is launched, the shell must first give it
access to the controlling terminal by calling `tcsetpgrp'.  Then, the
shell should wait for processes in that process group to terminate or
stop.  This is discussed in more detail in *note Stopped and Terminated
Jobs::.

   When all of the processes in the group have either completed or
stopped, the shell should regain control of the terminal for its own
process group by calling `tcsetpgrp' again.  Since stop signals caused
by I/O from a background process or a SUSP character typed by the user
are sent to the process group, normally all the processes in the job
stop together.

   The foreground job may have left the terminal in a strange state, so
the shell should restore its own saved terminal modes before
continuing.  In case the job is merely stopped, the shell should first
save the current terminal modes so that it can restore them later if
the job is continued.  The functions for dealing with terminal modes are
`tcgetattr' and `tcsetattr'; these are described in *note Terminal
Modes::.

   Here is the sample shell's function for doing all of this.

     /* Put job J in the foreground.  If CONT is nonzero,
        restore the saved terminal modes and send the process group a
        `SIGCONT' signal to wake it up before we block.  */

     void
     put_job_in_foreground (job *j, int cont)
     {
       /* Put the job into the foreground.  */
       tcsetpgrp (shell_terminal, j->pgid);

       /* Send the job a continue signal, if necessary.  */
       if (cont)
         {
           tcsetattr (shell_terminal, TCSADRAIN, &j->tmodes);
           if (kill (- j->pgid, SIGCONT) < 0)
             perror ("kill (SIGCONT)");
         }

       /* Wait for it to report.  */
       wait_for_job (j);

       /* Put the shell back in the foreground.  */
       tcsetpgrp (shell_terminal, shell_pgid);

       /* Restore the shell's terminal modes.  */
       tcgetattr (shell_terminal, &j->tmodes);
       tcsetattr (shell_terminal, TCSADRAIN, &shell_tmodes);
     }

   If the process group is launched as a background job, the shell
should remain in the foreground itself and continue to read commands
from the terminal.

   In the sample shell, there is not much that needs to be done to put
a job into the background.  Here is the function it uses:

     /* Put a job in the background.  If the cont argument is true, send
        the process group a `SIGCONT' signal to wake it up.  */

     void
     put_job_in_background (job *j, int cont)
     {
       /* Send the job a continue signal, if necessary.  */
       if (cont)
         if (kill (-j->pgid, SIGCONT) < 0)
           perror ("kill (SIGCONT)");
     }


File: libc.info,  Node: Stopped and Terminated Jobs,  Next: Continuing Stopped Jobs,  Prev: Foreground and Background,  Up: Implementing a Shell

27.6.5 Stopped and Terminated Jobs
----------------------------------

When a foreground process is launched, the shell must block until all of
the processes in that job have either terminated or stopped.  It can do
this by calling the `waitpid' function; see *note Process Completion::.
Use the `WUNTRACED' option so that status is reported for processes
that stop as well as processes that terminate.

   The shell must also check on the status of background jobs so that it
can report terminated and stopped jobs to the user; this can be done by
calling `waitpid' with the `WNOHANG' option.  A good place to put a
such a check for terminated and stopped jobs is just before prompting
for a new command.

   The shell can also receive asynchronous notification that there is
status information available for a child process by establishing a
handler for `SIGCHLD' signals.  *Note Signal Handling::.

   In the sample shell program, the `SIGCHLD' signal is normally
ignored.  This is to avoid reentrancy problems involving the global data
structures the shell manipulates.  But at specific times when the shell
is not using these data structures--such as when it is waiting for
input on the terminal--it makes sense to enable a handler for
`SIGCHLD'.  The same function that is used to do the synchronous status
checks (`do_job_notification', in this case) can also be called from
within this handler.

   Here are the parts of the sample shell program that deal with
checking the status of jobs and reporting the information to the user.

     /* Store the status of the process PID that was returned by waitpid.
        Return 0 if all went well, nonzero otherwise.  */

     int
     mark_process_status (pid_t pid, int status)
     {
       job *j;
       process *p;

       if (pid > 0)
         {
           /* Update the record for the process.  */
           for (j = first_job; j; j = j->next)
             for (p = j->first_process; p; p = p->next)
               if (p->pid == pid)
                 {
                   p->status = status;
                   if (WIFSTOPPED (status))
                     p->stopped = 1;
                   else
                     {
                       p->completed = 1;
                       if (WIFSIGNALED (status))
                         fprintf (stderr, "%d: Terminated by signal %d.\n",
                                  (int) pid, WTERMSIG (p->status));
                     }
                   return 0;
                  }
           fprintf (stderr, "No child process %d.\n", pid);
           return -1;
         }
       else if (pid == 0 || errno == ECHILD)
         /* No processes ready to report.  */
         return -1;
       else {
         /* Other weird errors.  */
         perror ("waitpid");
         return -1;
       }
     }

     /* Check for processes that have status information available,
        without blocking.  */

     void
     update_status (void)
     {
       int status;
       pid_t pid;

       do
         pid = waitpid (WAIT_ANY, &status, WUNTRACED|WNOHANG);
       while (!mark_process_status (pid, status));
     }

     /* Check for processes that have status information available,
        blocking until all processes in the given job have reported.  */

     void
     wait_for_job (job *j)
     {
       int status;
       pid_t pid;

       do
         pid = waitpid (WAIT_ANY, &status, WUNTRACED);
       while (!mark_process_status (pid, status)
              && !job_is_stopped (j)
              && !job_is_completed (j));
     }

     /* Format information about job status for the user to look at.  */

     void
     format_job_info (job *j, const char *status)
     {
       fprintf (stderr, "%ld (%s): %s\n", (long)j->pgid, status, j->command);
     }

     /* Notify the user about stopped or terminated jobs.
        Delete terminated jobs from the active job list.  */

     void
     do_job_notification (void)
     {
       job *j, *jlast, *jnext;
       process *p;

       /* Update status information for child processes.  */
       update_status ();

       jlast = NULL;
       for (j = first_job; j; j = jnext)
         {
           jnext = j->next;

           /* If all processes have completed, tell the user the job has
              completed and delete it from the list of active jobs.  */
           if (job_is_completed (j)) {
             format_job_info (j, "completed");
             if (jlast)
               jlast->next = jnext;
             else
               first_job = jnext;
             free_job (j);
           }

           /* Notify the user about stopped jobs,
              marking them so that we won't do this more than once.  */
           else if (job_is_stopped (j) && !j->notified) {
             format_job_info (j, "stopped");
             j->notified = 1;
             jlast = j;
           }

           /* Don't say anything about jobs that are still running.  */
           else
             jlast = j;
         }
     }


File: libc.info,  Node: Continuing Stopped Jobs,  Next: Missing Pieces,  Prev: Stopped and Terminated Jobs,  Up: Implementing a Shell

27.6.6 Continuing Stopped Jobs
------------------------------

The shell can continue a stopped job by sending a `SIGCONT' signal to
its process group.  If the job is being continued in the foreground,
the shell should first invoke `tcsetpgrp' to give the job access to the
terminal, and restore the saved terminal settings.  After continuing a
job in the foreground, the shell should wait for the job to stop or
complete, as if the job had just been launched in the foreground.

   The sample shell program handles both newly created and continued
jobs with the same pair of functions, `put_job_in_foreground' and
`put_job_in_background'.  The definitions of these functions were given
in *note Foreground and Background::.  When continuing a stopped job, a
nonzero value is passed as the CONT argument to ensure that the
`SIGCONT' signal is sent and the terminal modes reset, as appropriate.

   This leaves only a function for updating the shell's internal
bookkeeping about the job being continued:

     /* Mark a stopped job J as being running again.  */

     void
     mark_job_as_running (job *j)
     {
       Process *p;

       for (p = j->first_process; p; p = p->next)
         p->stopped = 0;
       j->notified = 0;
     }

     /* Continue the job J.  */

     void
     continue_job (job *j, int foreground)
     {
       mark_job_as_running (j);
       if (foreground)
         put_job_in_foreground (j, 1);
       else
         put_job_in_background (j, 1);
     }


File: libc.info,  Node: Missing Pieces,  Prev: Continuing Stopped Jobs,  Up: Implementing a Shell

27.6.7 The Missing Pieces
-------------------------

The code extracts for the sample shell included in this chapter are only
a part of the entire shell program.  In particular, nothing at all has
been said about how `job' and `program' data structures are allocated
and initialized.

   Most real shells provide a complex user interface that has support
for a command language; variables; abbreviations, substitutions, and
pattern matching on file names; and the like.  All of this is far too
complicated to explain here!  Instead, we have concentrated on showing
how to implement the core process creation and job control functions
that can be called from such a shell.

   Here is a table summarizing the major entry points we have presented:

`void init_shell (void)'
     Initialize the shell's internal state.  *Note Initializing the
     Shell::.

`void launch_job (job *J, int FOREGROUND)'
     Launch the job J as either a foreground or background job.  *Note
     Launching Jobs::.

`void do_job_notification (void)'
     Check for and report any jobs that have terminated or stopped.
     Can be called synchronously or within a handler for `SIGCHLD'
     signals.  *Note Stopped and Terminated Jobs::.

`void continue_job (job *J, int FOREGROUND)'
     Continue the job J.  *Note Continuing Stopped Jobs::.

   Of course, a real shell would also want to provide other functions
for managing jobs.  For example, it would be useful to have commands to
list all active jobs or to send a signal (such as `SIGKILL') to a job.


File: libc.info,  Node: Functions for Job Control,  Prev: Implementing a Shell,  Up: Job Control

27.7 Functions for Job Control
==============================

This section contains detailed descriptions of the functions relating
to job control.

* Menu:

* Identifying the Terminal::    Determining the controlling terminal's name.
* Process Group Functions::     Functions for manipulating process groups.
* Terminal Access Functions::   Functions for controlling terminal access.


File: libc.info,  Node: Identifying the Terminal,  Next: Process Group Functions,  Up: Functions for Job Control

27.7.1 Identifying the Controlling Terminal
-------------------------------------------

You can use the `ctermid' function to get a file name that you can use
to open the controlling terminal.  In the GNU C Library, it returns the
same string all the time: `"/dev/tty"'.  That is a special "magic" file
name that refers to the controlling terminal of the current process (if
it has one).  To find the name of the specific terminal device, use
`ttyname'; *note Is It a Terminal::.

   The function `ctermid' is declared in the header file `stdio.h'.  

 -- Function: char * ctermid (char *STRING)
     Preliminary: | MT-Safe | AS-Safe | AC-Safe | *Note POSIX Safety
     Concepts::.

     The `ctermid' function returns a string containing the file name of
     the controlling terminal for the current process.  If STRING is
     not a null pointer, it should be an array that can hold at least
     `L_ctermid' characters; the string is returned in this array.
     Otherwise, a pointer to a string in a static area is returned,
     which might get overwritten on subsequent calls to this function.

     An empty string is returned if the file name cannot be determined
     for any reason.  Even if a file name is returned, access to the
     file it represents is not guaranteed.

 -- Macro: int L_ctermid
     The value of this macro is an integer constant expression that
     represents the size of a string large enough to hold the file name
     returned by `ctermid'.

   See also the `isatty' and `ttyname' functions, in *note Is It a
Terminal::.


File: libc.info,  Node: Process Group Functions,  Next: Terminal Access Functions,  Prev: Identifying the Terminal,  Up: Functions for Job Control

27.7.2 Process Group Functions
------------------------------

Here are descriptions of the functions for manipulating process groups.
Your program should include the header files `sys/types.h' and
`unistd.h' to use these functions.  

 -- Function: pid_t setsid (void)
     Preliminary: | MT-Safe | AS-Safe | AC-Safe | *Note POSIX Safety
     Concepts::.

     The `setsid' function creates a new session.  The calling process
     becomes the session leader, and is put in a new process group whose
     process group ID is the same as the process ID of that process.
     There are initially no other processes in the new process group,
     and no other process groups in the new session.

     This function also makes the calling process have no controlling
     terminal.

     The `setsid' function returns the new process group ID of the
     calling process if successful.  A return value of `-1' indicates an
     error.  The following `errno' error conditions are defined for this
     function:

    `EPERM'
          The calling process is already a process group leader, or
          there is already another process group around that has the
          same process group ID.

 -- Function: pid_t getsid (pid_t PID)
     Preliminary: | MT-Safe | AS-Safe | AC-Safe | *Note POSIX Safety
     Concepts::.

     The `getsid' function returns the process group ID of the session
     leader of the specified process.  If a PID is `0', the process
     group ID of the session leader of the current process is returned.

     In case of error `-1' is returned and `errno' is set.  The
     following `errno' error conditions are defined for this function:

    `ESRCH'
          There is no process with the given process ID PID.

    `EPERM'
          The calling process and the process specified by PID are in
          different sessions, and the implementation doesn't allow to
          access the process group ID of the session leader of the
          process with ID PID from the calling process.

 -- Function: pid_t getpgrp (void)
     Preliminary: | MT-Safe | AS-Safe | AC-Safe | *Note POSIX Safety
     Concepts::.

     The `getpgrp' function returns the process group ID of the calling
     process.

 -- Function: int getpgid (pid_t PID)
     Preliminary: | MT-Safe | AS-Safe | AC-Safe | *Note POSIX Safety
     Concepts::.

     The `getpgid' function returns the process group ID of the process
     PID.  You can supply a value of `0' for the PID argument to get
     information about the calling process.

     In case of error `-1' is returned and `errno' is set.  The
     following `errno' error conditions are defined for this function:

    `ESRCH'
          There is no process with the given process ID PID.  The
          calling process and the process specified by PID are in
          different sessions, and the implementation doesn't allow to
          access the process group ID of the process with ID PID from
          the calling process.

 -- Function: int setpgid (pid_t PID, pid_t PGID)
     Preliminary: | MT-Safe | AS-Safe | AC-Safe | *Note POSIX Safety
     Concepts::.

     The `setpgid' function puts the process PID into the process group
     PGID.  As a special case, either PID or PGID can be zero to
     indicate the process ID of the calling process.

     This function fails on a system that does not support job control.
     *Note Job Control is Optional::, for more information.

     If the operation is successful, `setpgid' returns zero.  Otherwise
     it returns `-1'.  The following `errno' error conditions are
     defined for this function:

    `EACCES'
          The child process named by PID has executed an `exec'
          function since it was forked.

    `EINVAL'
          The value of the PGID is not valid.

    `ENOSYS'
          The system doesn't support job control.

    `EPERM'
          The process indicated by the PID argument is a session leader,
          or is not in the same session as the calling process, or the
          value of the PGID argument doesn't match a process group ID
          in the same session as the calling process.

    `ESRCH'
          The process indicated by the PID argument is not the calling
          process or a child of the calling process.

 -- Function: int setpgrp (pid_t PID, pid_t PGID)
     Preliminary: | MT-Safe | AS-Safe | AC-Safe | *Note POSIX Safety
     Concepts::.

     This is the BSD Unix name for `setpgid'.  Both functions do exactly
     the same thing.


File: libc.info,  Node: Terminal Access Functions,  Prev: Process Group Functions,  Up: Functions for Job Control

27.7.3 Functions for Controlling Terminal Access
------------------------------------------------

These are the functions for reading or setting the foreground process
group of a terminal.  You should include the header files `sys/types.h'
and `unistd.h' in your application to use these functions.  

   Although these functions take a file descriptor argument to specify
the terminal device, the foreground job is associated with the terminal
file itself and not a particular open file descriptor.

 -- Function: pid_t tcgetpgrp (int FILEDES)
     Preliminary: | MT-Safe | AS-Safe | AC-Safe | *Note POSIX Safety
     Concepts::.

     This function returns the process group ID of the foreground
     process group associated with the terminal open on descriptor
     FILEDES.

     If there is no foreground process group, the return value is a
     number greater than `1' that does not match the process group ID
     of any existing process group.  This can happen if all of the
     processes in the job that was formerly the foreground job have
     terminated, and no other job has yet been moved into the
     foreground.

     In case of an error, a value of `-1' is returned.  The following
     `errno' error conditions are defined for this function:

    `EBADF'
          The FILEDES argument is not a valid file descriptor.

    `ENOSYS'
          The system doesn't support job control.

    `ENOTTY'
          The terminal file associated with the FILEDES argument isn't
          the controlling terminal of the calling process.

 -- Function: int tcsetpgrp (int FILEDES, pid_t PGID)
     Preliminary: | MT-Safe | AS-Safe | AC-Safe | *Note POSIX Safety
     Concepts::.

     This function is used to set a terminal's foreground process group
     ID.  The argument FILEDES is a descriptor which specifies the
     terminal; PGID specifies the process group.  The calling process
     must be a member of the same session as PGID and must have the same
     controlling terminal.

     For terminal access purposes, this function is treated as output.
     If it is called from a background process on its controlling
     terminal, normally all processes in the process group are sent a
     `SIGTTOU' signal.  The exception is if the calling process itself
     is ignoring or blocking `SIGTTOU' signals, in which case the
     operation is performed and no signal is sent.

     If successful, `tcsetpgrp' returns `0'.  A return value of `-1'
     indicates an error.  The following `errno' error conditions are
     defined for this function:

    `EBADF'
          The FILEDES argument is not a valid file descriptor.

    `EINVAL'
          The PGID argument is not valid.

    `ENOSYS'
          The system doesn't support job control.

    `ENOTTY'
          The FILEDES isn't the controlling terminal of the calling
          process.

    `EPERM'
          The PGID isn't a process group in the same session as the
          calling process.

 -- Function: pid_t tcgetsid (int FILDES)
     Preliminary: | MT-Safe | AS-Safe | AC-Safe | *Note POSIX Safety
     Concepts::.

     This function is used to obtain the process group ID of the session
     for which the terminal specified by FILDES is the controlling
     terminal.  If the call is successful the group ID is returned.
     Otherwise the return value is `(pid_t) -1' and the global variable
     ERRNO is set to the following value:
    `EBADF'
          The FILEDES argument is not a valid file descriptor.

    `ENOTTY'
          The calling process does not have a controlling terminal, or
          the file is not the controlling terminal.


File: libc.info,  Node: Name Service Switch,  Next: Users and Groups,  Prev: Job Control,  Up: Top

28 System Databases and Name Service Switch
*******************************************

Various functions in the C Library need to be configured to work
correctly in the local environment.  Traditionally, this was done by
using files (e.g., `/etc/passwd'), but other nameservices (like the
Network Information Service (NIS) and the Domain Name Service (DNS))
became popular, and were hacked into the C library, usually with a fixed
search order.

   The GNU C Library contains a cleaner solution of this problem.  It is
designed after a method used by Sun Microsystems in the C library of
Solaris 2.  The GNU C Library follows their name and calls this scheme
"Name Service Switch" (NSS).

   Though the interface might be similar to Sun's version there is no
common code.  We never saw any source code of Sun's implementation and
so the internal interface is incompatible.  This also manifests in the
file names we use as we will see later.

* Menu:

* NSS Basics::                  What is this NSS good for.
* NSS Configuration File::      Configuring NSS.
* NSS Module Internals::        How does it work internally.
* Extending NSS::               What to do to add services or databases.


File: libc.info,  Node: NSS Basics,  Next: NSS Configuration File,  Prev: Name Service Switch,  Up: Name Service Switch

28.1 NSS Basics
===============

The basic idea is to put the implementation of the different services
offered to access the databases in separate modules.  This has some
advantages:

  1. Contributors can add new services without adding them to the GNU C
     Library.

  2. The modules can be updated separately.

  3. The C library image is smaller.

   To fulfill the first goal above the ABI of the modules will be
described below.  For getting the implementation of a new service right
it is important to understand how the functions in the modules get
called.  They are in no way designed to be used by the programmer
directly.  Instead the programmer should only use the documented and
standardized functions to access the databases.

The databases available in the NSS are

`aliases'
     Mail aliases

`ethers'
     Ethernet numbers,

`group'
     Groups of users, *note Group Database::.

`hosts'
     Host names and numbers, *note Host Names::.

`netgroup'
     Network wide list of host and users, *note Netgroup Database::.

`networks'
     Network names and numbers, *note Networks Database::.

`protocols'
     Network protocols, *note Protocols Database::.

`passwd'
     User passwords, *note User Database::.

`rpc'
     Remote procedure call names and numbers,

`services'
     Network services, *note Services Database::.

`shadow'
     Shadow user passwords,

There will be some more added later (`automount', `bootparams',
`netmasks', and `publickey').


File: libc.info,  Node: NSS Configuration File,  Next: NSS Module Internals,  Prev: NSS Basics,  Up: Name Service Switch

28.2 The NSS Configuration File
===============================

Somehow the NSS code must be told about the wishes of the user.  For
this reason there is the file `/etc/nsswitch.conf'.  For each database
this file contain a specification how the lookup process should work.
The file could look like this:

     # /etc/nsswitch.conf
     #
     # Name Service Switch configuration file.
     #

     passwd:     db files nis
     shadow:     files
     group:      db files nis

     hosts:      files nisplus nis dns
     networks:   nisplus [NOTFOUND=return] files

     ethers:     nisplus [NOTFOUND=return] db files
     protocols:  nisplus [NOTFOUND=return] db files
     rpc:        nisplus [NOTFOUND=return] db files
     services:   nisplus [NOTFOUND=return] db files

   The first column is the database as you can guess from the table
above.  The rest of the line specifies how the lookup process works.
Please note that you specify the way it works for each database
individually.  This cannot be done with the old way of a monolithic
implementation.

   The configuration specification for each database can contain two
different items:

   * the service specification like `files', `db', or `nis'.

   * the reaction on lookup result like `[NOTFOUND=return]'.

* Menu:

* Services in the NSS configuration::  Service names in the NSS configuration.
* Actions in the NSS configuration::  React appropriately to the lookup result.
* Notes on NSS Configuration File::  Things to take care about while
                                     configuring NSS.


File: libc.info,  Node: Services in the NSS configuration,  Next: Actions in the NSS configuration,  Prev: NSS Configuration File,  Up: NSS Configuration File

28.2.1 Services in the NSS configuration File
---------------------------------------------

The above example file mentions five different services: `files', `db',
`dns', `nis', and `nisplus'.  This does not mean these services are
available on all sites and it does also not mean these are all the
services which will ever be available.

   In fact, these names are simply strings which the NSS code uses to
find the implicitly addressed functions.  The internal interface will be
described later.  Visible to the user are the modules which implement an
individual service.

   Assume the service NAME shall be used for a lookup.  The code for
this service is implemented in a module called `libnss_NAME'.  On a
system supporting shared libraries this is in fact a shared library
with the name (for example) `libnss_NAME.so.2'.  The number at the end
is the currently used version of the interface which will not change
frequently.  Normally the user should not have to be cognizant of these
files since they should be placed in a directory where they are found
automatically.  Only the names of all available services are important.


File: libc.info,  Node: Actions in the NSS configuration,  Next: Notes on NSS Configuration File,  Prev: Services in the NSS configuration,  Up: NSS Configuration File

28.2.2 Actions in the NSS configuration
---------------------------------------

The second item in the specification gives the user much finer control
on the lookup process.  Action items are placed between two service
names and are written within brackets.  The general form is

     `[' ( `!'? STATUS `=' ACTION )+ `]'

where

     STATUS => success | notfound | unavail | tryagain
     ACTION => return | continue

   The case of the keywords is insignificant.  The STATUS values are
the results of a call to a lookup function of a specific service.  They
mean

`success'
     No error occurred and the wanted entry is returned.  The default
     action for this is `return'.

`notfound'
     The lookup process works ok but the needed value was not found.
     The default action is `continue'.

`unavail'
     The service is permanently unavailable.  This can either mean the
     needed file is not available, or, for DNS, the server is not
     available or does not allow queries.  The default action is
     `continue'.

`tryagain'
     The service is temporarily unavailable.  This could mean a file is
     locked or a server currently cannot accept more connections.  The
     default action is `continue'.

If we have a line like

     ethers: nisplus [NOTFOUND=return] db files

this is equivalent to

     ethers: nisplus [SUCCESS=return NOTFOUND=return UNAVAIL=continue
                      TRYAGAIN=continue]
             db      [SUCCESS=return NOTFOUND=continue UNAVAIL=continue
                      TRYAGAIN=continue]
             files

(except that it would have to be written on one line).  The default
value for the actions are normally what you want, and only need to be
changed in exceptional cases.

   If the optional `!' is placed before the STATUS this means the
following action is used for all statuses but STATUS itself.  I.e., `!'
is negation as in the C language (and others).

   Before we explain the exception which makes this action item
necessary one more remark: obviously it makes no sense to add another
action item after the `files' service.  Since there is no other service
following the action _always_ is `return'.

   Now, why is this `[NOTFOUND=return]' action useful?  To understand
this we should know that the `nisplus' service is often complete; i.e.,
if an entry is not available in the NIS+ tables it is not available
anywhere else.  This is what is expressed by this action item: it is
useless to examine further services since they will not give us a
result.

   The situation would be different if the NIS+ service is not available
because the machine is booting.  In this case the return value of the
lookup function is not `notfound' but instead `unavail'.  And as you
can see in the complete form above: in this situation the `db' and
`files' services are used.  Neat, isn't it?  The system administrator
need not pay special care for the time the system is not completely
ready to work (while booting or shutdown or network problems).


File: libc.info,  Node: Notes on NSS Configuration File,  Prev: Actions in the NSS configuration,  Up: NSS Configuration File

28.2.3 Notes on the NSS Configuration File
------------------------------------------

Finally a few more hints.  The NSS implementation is not completely
helpless if `/etc/nsswitch.conf' does not exist.  For all supported
databases there is a default value so it should normally be possible to
get the system running even if the file is corrupted or missing.

   For the `hosts' and `networks' databases the default value is `dns
[!UNAVAIL=return] files'.  I.e., the system is prepared for the DNS
service not to be available but if it is available the answer it
returns is definitive.

   The `passwd', `group', and `shadow' databases are traditionally
handled in a special way.  The appropriate files in the `/etc'
directory are read but if an entry with a name starting with a `+'
character is found NIS is used.  This kind of lookup remains possible
by using the special lookup service `compat' and the default value for
the three databases above is `compat [NOTFOUND=return] files'.

   For all other databases the default value is `nis [NOTFOUND=return]
files'.  This solution give the best chance to be correct since NIS and
file based lookup is used.

   A second point is that the user should try to optimize the lookup
process.  The different service have different response times.  A
simple file look up on a local file could be fast, but if the file is
long and the needed entry is near the end of the file this may take
quite some time.  In this case it might be better to use the `db'
service which allows fast local access to large data sets.

   Often the situation is that some global information like NIS must be
used.  So it is unavoidable to use service entries like `nis' etc.  But
one should avoid slow services like this if possible.


File: libc.info,  Node: NSS Module Internals,  Next: Extending NSS,  Prev: NSS Configuration File,  Up: Name Service Switch

28.3 NSS Module Internals
=========================

Now it is time to describe what the modules look like.  The functions
contained in a module are identified by their names.  I.e., there is no
jump table or the like.  How this is done is of no interest here; those
interested in this topic should read about Dynamic Linking.

* Menu:

* NSS Module Names::            Construction of the interface function of
                                the NSS modules.
* NSS Modules Interface::       Programming interface in the NSS module
                                functions.


File: libc.info,  Node: NSS Module Names,  Next: NSS Modules Interface,  Prev: NSS Module Internals,  Up: NSS Module Internals

28.3.1 The Naming Scheme of the NSS Modules
-------------------------------------------

The name of each function consist of various parts:

            _nss_SERVICE_FUNCTION

   SERVICE of course corresponds to the name of the module this
function is found in.(1)  The FUNCTION part is derived from the
interface function in the C library itself.  If the user calls the
function `gethostbyname' and the service used is `files' the function

            _nss_files_gethostbyname_r

in the module

            libnss_files.so.2

is used.  You see, what is explained above in not the whole truth.  In
fact the NSS modules only contain reentrant versions of the lookup
functions.  I.e., if the user would call the `gethostbyname_r' function
this also would end in the above function.  For all user interface
functions the C library maps this call to a call to the reentrant
function.  For reentrant functions this is trivial since the interface
is (nearly) the same.  For the non-reentrant version The library keeps
internal buffers which are used to replace the user supplied buffer.

   I.e., the reentrant functions _can_ have counterparts.  No service
module is forced to have functions for all databases and all kinds to
access them.  If a function is not available it is simply treated as if
the function would return `unavail' (*note Actions in the NSS
configuration::).

   The file name `libnss_files.so.2' would be on a Solaris 2 system
`nss_files.so.2'.  This is the difference mentioned above.  Sun's NSS
modules are usable as modules which get indirectly loaded only.

   The NSS modules in the GNU C Library are prepared to be used as
normal libraries themselves.  This is _not_ true at the moment, though.
However,  the organization of the name space in the modules does not
make it impossible like it is for Solaris.  Now you can see why the
modules are still libraries.(2)

   ---------- Footnotes ----------

   (1) Now you might ask why this information is duplicated.  The
answer is that we want to make it possible to link directly with these
shared objects.

   (2) There is a second explanation: we were too lazy to change the
Makefiles to allow the generation of shared objects not starting with
`lib' but don't tell this to anybody.


File: libc.info,  Node: NSS Modules Interface,  Prev: NSS Module Names,  Up: NSS Module Internals

28.3.2 The Interface of the Function in NSS Modules
---------------------------------------------------

Now we know about the functions contained in the modules.  It is now
time to describe the types.  When we mentioned the reentrant versions of
the functions above, this means there are some additional arguments
(compared with the standard, non-reentrant version).  The prototypes for
the non-reentrant and reentrant versions of our function above are:

     struct hostent *gethostbyname (const char *name)

     int gethostbyname_r (const char *name, struct hostent *result_buf,
                          char *buf, size_t buflen, struct hostent **result,
                          int *h_errnop)

The actual prototype of the function in the NSS modules in this case is

     enum nss_status _nss_files_gethostbyname_r (const char *name,
                                                 struct hostent *result_buf,
                                                 char *buf, size_t buflen,
                                                 int *errnop, int *h_errnop)

   I.e., the interface function is in fact the reentrant function with
the change of the return value and the omission of the RESULT
parameter.  While the user-level function returns a pointer to the
result the reentrant function return an `enum nss_status' value:

`NSS_STATUS_TRYAGAIN'
     numeric value `-2'

`NSS_STATUS_UNAVAIL'
     numeric value `-1'

`NSS_STATUS_NOTFOUND'
     numeric value `0'

`NSS_STATUS_SUCCESS'
     numeric value `1'

Now you see where the action items of the `/etc/nsswitch.conf' file are
used.

   If you study the source code you will find there is a fifth value:
`NSS_STATUS_RETURN'.  This is an internal use only value, used by a few
functions in places where none of the above value can be used.  If
necessary the source code should be examined to learn about the details.

   In case the interface function has to return an error it is important
that the correct error code is stored in `*ERRNOP'.  Some return status
value have only one associated error code, others have more.

`NSS_STATUS_TRYAGAIN'   `EAGAIN'      One of the functions used ran
                                      temporarily out of resources or a
                                      service is currently not available.
                       `ERANGE'       The provided buffer is not large
                                      enough.  The function should be
                                      called again with a larger buffer.
`NSS_STATUS_UNAVAIL'    `ENOENT'      A necessary input file cannot be
                                      found.
`NSS_STATUS_NOTFOUND'   `ENOENT'      The requested entry is not
                                      available.

   These are proposed values.  There can be other error codes and the
described error codes can have different meaning.  *With one
exception:* when returning `NSS_STATUS_TRYAGAIN' the error code
`ERANGE' _must_ mean that the user provided buffer is too small.
Everything is non-critical.

   The above function has something special which is missing for almost
all the other module functions.  There is an argument H_ERRNOP.  This
points to a variable which will be filled with the error code in case
the execution of the function fails for some reason.  The reentrant
function cannot use the global variable H_ERRNO; `gethostbyname' calls
`gethostbyname_r' with the last argument set to `&h_errno'.

   The `getXXXbyYYY' functions are the most important functions in the
NSS modules.  But there are others which implement the other ways to
access system databases (say for the password database, there are
`setpwent', `getpwent', and `endpwent').  These will be described in
more detail later.  Here we give a general way to determine the
signature of the module function:

   * the return value is `int';

   * the name is as explained in *note NSS Module Names::;

   * the first arguments are identical to the arguments of the
     non-reentrant function;

   * the next three arguments are:

    `STRUCT_TYPE *result_buf'
          pointer to buffer where the result is stored.  `STRUCT_TYPE'
          is normally a struct which corresponds to the database.

    `char *buffer'
          pointer to a buffer where the function can store additional
          data for the result etc.

    `size_t buflen'
          length of the buffer pointed to by BUFFER.

   * possibly a last argument H_ERRNOP, for the host name and network
     name lookup functions.

This table is correct for all functions but the `set...ent' and
`end...ent' functions.


File: libc.info,  Node: Extending NSS,  Prev: NSS Module Internals,  Up: Name Service Switch

28.4 Extending NSS
==================

One of the advantages of NSS mentioned above is that it can be extended
quite easily.  There are two ways in which the extension can happen:
adding another database or adding another service.  The former is
normally done only by the C library developers.  It is here only
important to remember that adding another database is independent from
adding another service because a service need not support all databases
or lookup functions.

   A designer/implementor of a new service is therefore free to choose
the databases s/he is interested in and leave the rest for later (or
completely aside).

* Menu:

* Adding another Service to NSS::  What is to do to add a new service.
* NSS Module Function Internals::  Guidelines for writing new NSS
                                        service functions.


File: libc.info,  Node: Adding another Service to NSS,  Next: NSS Module Function Internals,  Prev: Extending NSS,  Up: Extending NSS

28.4.1 Adding another Service to NSS
------------------------------------

The sources for a new service need not (and should not) be part of the
GNU C Library itself.  The developer retains complete control over the
sources and its development.  The links between the C library and the
new service module consists solely of the interface functions.

   Each module is designed following a specific interface specification.
For now the version is 2 (the interface in version 1 was not adequate)
and this manifests in the version number of the shared library object of
the NSS modules: they have the extension `.2'.  If the interface
changes again in an incompatible way, this number will be increased.
Modules using the old interface will still be usable.

   Developers of a new service will have to make sure that their module
is created using the correct interface number.  This means the file
itself must have the correct name and on ELF systems the "soname"
(Shared Object Name) must also have this number.  Building a module
from a bunch of object files on an ELF system using GNU CC could be
done like this:

     gcc -shared -o libnss_NAME.so.2 -Wl,-soname,libnss_NAME.so.2 OBJECTS

*note Options for Linking: (gcc)Link Options, to learn more about this
command line.

   To use the new module the library must be able to find it.  This can
be achieved by using options for the dynamic linker so that it will
search the directory where the binary is placed.  For an ELF system
this could be done by adding the wanted directory to the value of
`LD_LIBRARY_PATH'.

   But this is not always possible since some programs (those which run
under IDs which do not belong to the user) ignore this variable.
Therefore the stable version of the module should be placed into a
directory which is searched by the dynamic linker.  Normally this should
be the directory `$prefix/lib', where `$prefix' corresponds to the
value given to configure using the `--prefix' option.  But be careful:
this should only be done if it is clear the module does not cause any
harm.  System administrators should be careful.


File: libc.info,  Node: NSS Module Function Internals,  Prev: Adding another Service to NSS,  Up: Extending NSS

28.4.2 Internals of the NSS Module Functions
--------------------------------------------

Until now we only provided the syntactic interface for the functions in
the NSS module.  In fact there is not much more we can say since the
implementation obviously is different for each function.  But a few
general rules must be followed by all functions.

   In fact there are four kinds of different functions which may appear
in the interface.  All derive from the traditional ones for system
databases.  DB in the following table is normally an abbreviation for
the database (e.g., it is `pw' for the password database).

`enum nss_status _nss_DATABASE_setDBent (void)'
     This function prepares the service for following operations.  For a
     simple file based lookup this means files could be opened, for
     other services this function simply is a noop.

     One special case for this function is that it takes an additional
     argument for some DATABASEs (i.e., the interface is `int setDBent
     (int)').  *note Host Names::, which describes the `sethostent'
     function.

     The return value should be NSS_STATUS_SUCCESS or according to the
     table above in case of an error (*note NSS Modules Interface::).

`enum nss_status _nss_DATABASE_endDBent (void)'
     This function simply closes all files which are still open or
     removes buffer caches.  If there are no files or buffers to remove
     this is again a simple noop.

     There normally is no return value different to NSS_STATUS_SUCCESS.

`enum nss_status _nss_DATABASE_getDBent_r (STRUCTURE *result, char *buffer, size_t buflen, int *errnop)'
     Since this function will be called several times in a row to
     retrieve one entry after the other it must keep some kind of
     state.  But this also means the functions are not really
     reentrant.  They are reentrant only in that simultaneous calls to
     this function will not try to write the retrieved data in the same
     place (as it would be the case for the non-reentrant functions);
     instead, it writes to the structure pointed to by the RESULT
     parameter.  But the calls share a common state and in the case of
     a file access this means they return neighboring entries in the
     file.

     The buffer of length BUFLEN pointed to by BUFFER can be used for
     storing some additional data for the result.  It is _not_
     guaranteed that the same buffer will be passed for the next call
     of this function.  Therefore one must not misuse this buffer to
     save some state information from one call to another.

     Before the function returns the implementation should store the
     value of the local ERRNO variable in the variable pointed to be
     ERRNOP.  This is important to guarantee the module working in
     statically linked programs.

     As explained above this function could also have an additional last
     argument.  This depends on the database used; it happens only for
     `host' and `networks'.

     The function shall return `NSS_STATUS_SUCCESS' as long as there are
     more entries.  When the last entry was read it should return
     `NSS_STATUS_NOTFOUND'.  When the buffer given as an argument is too
     small for the data to be returned `NSS_STATUS_TRYAGAIN' should be
     returned.  When the service was not formerly initialized by a call
     to `_nss_DATABASE_setDBent' all return value allowed for this
     function can also be returned here.

`enum nss_status _nss_DATABASE_getDBbyXX_r (PARAMS, STRUCTURE *result, char *buffer, size_t buflen, int *errnop)'
     This function shall return the entry from the database which is
     addressed by the PARAMS.  The type and number of these arguments
     vary.  It must be individually determined by looking to the
     user-level interface functions.  All arguments given to the
     non-reentrant version are here described by PARAMS.

     The result must be stored in the structure pointed to by RESULT.
     If there is additional data to return (say strings, where the
     RESULT structure only contains pointers) the function must use the
     BUFFER or length BUFLEN.  There must not be any references to
     non-constant global data.

     The implementation of this function should honor the STAYOPEN flag
     set by the `setDBent' function whenever this makes sense.

     Before the function returns the implementation should store the
     value of the local ERRNO variable in the variable pointed to be
     ERRNOP.  This is important to guarantee the module working in
     statically linked programs.

     Again, this function takes an additional last argument for the
     `host' and `networks' database.

     The return value should as always follow the rules given above
     (*note NSS Modules Interface::).



File: libc.info,  Node: Users and Groups,  Next: System Management,  Prev: Name Service Switch,  Up: Top

29 Users and Groups
*******************

Every user who can log in on the system is identified by a unique number
called the "user ID".  Each process has an effective user ID which says
which user's access permissions it has.

   Users are classified into "groups" for access control purposes.  Each
process has one or more "group ID values" which say which groups the
process can use for access to files.

   The effective user and group IDs of a process collectively form its
"persona".  This determines which files the process can access.
Normally, a process inherits its persona from the parent process, but
under special circumstances a process can change its persona and thus
change its access permissions.

   Each file in the system also has a user ID and a group ID.  Access
control works by comparing the user and group IDs of the file with those
of the running process.

   The system keeps a database of all the registered users, and another
database of all the defined groups.  There are library functions you
can use to examine these databases.

* Menu:

* User and Group IDs::          Each user has a unique numeric ID;
				 likewise for groups.
* Process Persona::             The user IDs and group IDs of a process.
* Why Change Persona::          Why a program might need to change
				 its user and/or group IDs.
* How Change Persona::          Changing the user and group IDs.
* Reading Persona::             How to examine the user and group IDs.

* Setting User ID::             Functions for setting the user ID.
* Setting Groups::              Functions for setting the group IDs.

* Enable/Disable Setuid::       Turning setuid access on and off.
* Setuid Program Example::      The pertinent parts of one sample program.
* Tips for Setuid::             How to avoid granting unlimited access.

* Who Logged In::               Getting the name of the user who logged in,
				 or of the real user ID of the current process.

* User Accounting Database::    Keeping information about users and various
                                 actions in databases.

* User Database::               Functions and data structures for
                        	 accessing the user database.
* Group Database::              Functions and data structures for
                        	 accessing the group database.
* Database Example::            Example program showing the use of database
				 inquiry functions.
* Netgroup Database::           Functions for accessing the netgroup database.


File: libc.info,  Node: User and Group IDs,  Next: Process Persona,  Up: Users and Groups

29.1 User and Group IDs
=======================

Each user account on a computer system is identified by a "user name"
(or "login name") and "user ID".  Normally, each user name has a unique
user ID, but it is possible for several login names to have the same
user ID.  The user names and corresponding user IDs are stored in a
data base which you can access as described in *note User Database::.

   Users are classified in "groups".  Each user name belongs to one
"default group" and may also belong to any number of "supplementary
groups". Users who are members of the same group can share resources
(such as files) that are not accessible to users who are not a member
of that group.  Each group has a "group name" and "group ID".  *Note
Group Database::, for how to find information about a group ID or group
name.


File: libc.info,  Node: Process Persona,  Next: Why Change Persona,  Prev: User and Group IDs,  Up: Users and Groups

29.2 The Persona of a Process
=============================

At any time, each process has an "effective user ID", a "effective
group ID", and a set of "supplementary group IDs".  These IDs determine
the privileges of the process.  They are collectively called the
"persona" of the process, because they determine "who it is" for
purposes of access control.

   Your login shell starts out with a persona which consists of your
user ID, your default group ID, and your supplementary group IDs (if
you are in more than one group).  In normal circumstances, all your
other processes inherit these values.

   A process also has a "real user ID" which identifies the user who
created the process, and a "real group ID" which identifies that user's
default group.  These values do not play a role in access control, so
we do not consider them part of the persona.  But they are also
important.

   Both the real and effective user ID can be changed during the
lifetime of a process.  *Note Why Change Persona::.

   For details on how a process's effective user ID and group IDs affect
its permission to access files, see *note Access Permission::.

   The effective user ID of a process also controls permissions for
sending signals using the `kill' function.  *Note Signaling Another
Process::.

   Finally, there are many operations which can only be performed by a
process whose effective user ID is zero.  A process with this user ID is
a "privileged process".  Commonly the user name `root' is associated
with user ID 0, but there may be other user names with this ID.


File: libc.info,  Node: Why Change Persona,  Next: How Change Persona,  Prev: Process Persona,  Up: Users and Groups

29.3 Why Change the Persona of a Process?
=========================================

The most obvious situation where it is necessary for a process to change
its user and/or group IDs is the `login' program.  When `login' starts
running, its user ID is `root'.  Its job is to start a shell whose user
and group IDs are those of the user who is logging in.  (To accomplish
this fully, `login' must set the real user and group IDs as well as its
persona.  But this is a special case.)

   The more common case of changing persona is when an ordinary user
program needs access to a resource that wouldn't ordinarily be
accessible to the user actually running it.

   For example, you may have a file that is controlled by your program
but that shouldn't be read or modified directly by other users, either
because it implements some kind of locking protocol, or because you want
to preserve the integrity or privacy of the information it contains.
This kind of restricted access can be implemented by having the program
change its effective user or group ID to match that of the resource.

   Thus, imagine a game program that saves scores in a file.  The game
program itself needs to be able to update this file no matter who is
running it, but if users can write the file without going through the
game, they can give themselves any scores they like.  Some people
consider this undesirable, or even reprehensible.  It can be prevented
by creating a new user ID and login name (say, `games') to own the
scores file, and make the file writable only by this user.  Then, when
the game program wants to update this file, it can change its effective
user ID to be that for `games'.  In effect, the program must adopt the
persona of `games' so it can write the scores file.


File: libc.info,  Node: How Change Persona,  Next: Reading Persona,  Prev: Why Change Persona,  Up: Users and Groups

29.4 How an Application Can Change Persona
==========================================

The ability to change the persona of a process can be a source of
unintentional privacy violations, or even intentional abuse.  Because of
the potential for problems, changing persona is restricted to special
circumstances.

   You can't arbitrarily set your user ID or group ID to anything you
want; only privileged processes can do that.  Instead, the normal way
for a program to change its persona is that it has been set up in
advance to change to a particular user or group.  This is the function
of the setuid and setgid bits of a file's access mode.  *Note
Permission Bits::.

   When the setuid bit of an executable file is on, executing that file
gives the process a third user ID: the "file user ID".  This ID is set
to the owner ID of the file.  The system then changes the effective
user ID to the file user ID.  The real user ID remains as it was.
Likewise, if the setgid bit is on, the process is given a "file group
ID" equal to the group ID of the file, and its effective group ID is
changed to the file group ID.

   If a process has a file ID (user or group), then it can at any time
change its effective ID to its real ID and back to its file ID.
Programs use this feature to relinquish their special privileges except
when they actually need them.  This makes it less likely that they can
be tricked into doing something inappropriate with their privileges.

   *Portability Note:* Older systems do not have file IDs.  To
determine if a system has this feature, you can test the compiler
define `_POSIX_SAVED_IDS'.  (In the POSIX standard, file IDs are known
as saved IDs.)

   *Note File Attributes::, for a more general discussion of file modes
and accessibility.


File: libc.info,  Node: Reading Persona,  Next: Setting User ID,  Prev: How Change Persona,  Up: Users and Groups

29.5 Reading the Persona of a Process
=====================================

Here are detailed descriptions of the functions for reading the user and
group IDs of a process, both real and effective.  To use these
facilities, you must include the header files `sys/types.h' and
`unistd.h'.  

 -- Data Type: uid_t
     This is an integer data type used to represent user IDs.  In the
     GNU C Library, this is an alias for `unsigned int'.

 -- Data Type: gid_t
     This is an integer data type used to represent group IDs.  In the
     GNU C Library, this is an alias for `unsigned int'.

 -- Function: uid_t getuid (void)
     Preliminary: | MT-Safe | AS-Safe | AC-Safe | *Note POSIX Safety
     Concepts::.

     The `getuid' function returns the real user ID of the process.

 -- Function: gid_t getgid (void)
     Preliminary: | MT-Safe | AS-Safe | AC-Safe | *Note POSIX Safety
     Concepts::.

     The `getgid' function returns the real group ID of the process.

 -- Function: uid_t geteuid (void)
     Preliminary: | MT-Safe | AS-Safe | AC-Safe | *Note POSIX Safety
     Concepts::.

     The `geteuid' function returns the effective user ID of the
     process.

 -- Function: gid_t getegid (void)
     Preliminary: | MT-Safe | AS-Safe | AC-Safe | *Note POSIX Safety
     Concepts::.

     The `getegid' function returns the effective group ID of the
     process.

 -- Function: int getgroups (int COUNT, gid_t *GROUPS)
     Preliminary: | MT-Safe | AS-Safe | AC-Safe | *Note POSIX Safety
     Concepts::.

     The `getgroups' function is used to inquire about the supplementary
     group IDs of the process.  Up to COUNT of these group IDs are
     stored in the array GROUPS; the return value from the function is
     the number of group IDs actually stored.  If COUNT is smaller than
     the total number of supplementary group IDs, then `getgroups'
     returns a value of `-1' and `errno' is set to `EINVAL'.

     If COUNT is zero, then `getgroups' just returns the total number
     of supplementary group IDs.  On systems that do not support
     supplementary groups, this will always be zero.

     Here's how to use `getgroups' to read all the supplementary group
     IDs:

          gid_t *
          read_all_groups (void)
          {
            int ngroups = getgroups (0, NULL);
            gid_t *groups
              = (gid_t *) xmalloc (ngroups * sizeof (gid_t));
            int val = getgroups (ngroups, groups);
            if (val < 0)
              {
                free (groups);
                return NULL;
              }
            return groups;
          }


File: libc.info,  Node: Setting User ID,  Next: Setting Groups,  Prev: Reading Persona,  Up: Users and Groups

29.6 Setting the User ID
========================

This section describes the functions for altering the user ID (real
and/or effective) of a process.  To use these facilities, you must
include the header files `sys/types.h' and `unistd.h'.  

 -- Function: int seteuid (uid_t NEWEUID)
     Preliminary: | MT-Safe | AS-Unsafe lock | AC-Unsafe lock | *Note
     POSIX Safety Concepts::.

     This function sets the effective user ID of a process to NEWEUID,
     provided that the process is allowed to change its effective user
     ID.  A privileged process (effective user ID zero) can change its
     effective user ID to any legal value.  An unprivileged process
     with a file user ID can change its effective user ID to its real
     user ID or to its file user ID.  Otherwise, a process may not
     change its effective user ID at all.

     The `seteuid' function returns a value of `0' to indicate
     successful completion, and a value of `-1' to indicate an error.
     The following `errno' error conditions are defined for this
     function:

    `EINVAL'
          The value of the NEWEUID argument is invalid.

    `EPERM'
          The process may not change to the specified ID.

     Older systems (those without the `_POSIX_SAVED_IDS' feature) do not
     have this function.

 -- Function: int setuid (uid_t NEWUID)
     Preliminary: | MT-Safe | AS-Unsafe lock | AC-Unsafe lock | *Note
     POSIX Safety Concepts::.

     If the calling process is privileged, this function sets both the
     real and effective user ID of the process to NEWUID.  It also
     deletes the file user ID of the process, if any.  NEWUID may be any
     legal value.  (Once this has been done, there is no way to recover
     the old effective user ID.)

     If the process is not privileged, and the system supports the
     `_POSIX_SAVED_IDS' feature, then this function behaves like
     `seteuid'.

     The return values and error conditions are the same as for
     `seteuid'.

 -- Function: int setreuid (uid_t RUID, uid_t EUID)
     Preliminary: | MT-Safe | AS-Unsafe lock | AC-Unsafe lock | *Note
     POSIX Safety Concepts::.

     This function sets the real user ID of the process to RUID and the
     effective user ID to EUID.  If RUID is `-1', it means not to
     change the real user ID; likewise if EUID is `-1', it means not to
     change the effective user ID.

     The `setreuid' function exists for compatibility with 4.3 BSD Unix,
     which does not support file IDs.  You can use this function to
     swap the effective and real user IDs of the process.  (Privileged
     processes are not limited to this particular usage.)  If file IDs
     are supported, you should use that feature instead of this
     function.  *Note Enable/Disable Setuid::.

     The return value is `0' on success and `-1' on failure.  The
     following `errno' error conditions are defined for this function:

    `EPERM'
          The process does not have the appropriate privileges; you do
          not have permission to change to the specified ID.


File: libc.info,  Node: Setting Groups,  Next: Enable/Disable Setuid,  Prev: Setting User ID,  Up: Users and Groups

29.7 Setting the Group IDs
==========================

This section describes the functions for altering the group IDs (real
and effective) of a process.  To use these facilities, you must include
the header files `sys/types.h' and `unistd.h'.  

 -- Function: int setegid (gid_t NEWGID)
     Preliminary: | MT-Safe | AS-Unsafe lock | AC-Unsafe lock | *Note
     POSIX Safety Concepts::.

     This function sets the effective group ID of the process to
     NEWGID, provided that the process is allowed to change its group
     ID.  Just as with `seteuid', if the process is privileged it may
     change its effective group ID to any value; if it isn't, but it
     has a file group ID, then it may change to its real group ID or
     file group ID; otherwise it may not change its effective group ID.

     Note that a process is only privileged if its effective _user_ ID
     is zero.  The effective group ID only affects access permissions.

     The return values and error conditions for `setegid' are the same
     as those for `seteuid'.

     This function is only present if `_POSIX_SAVED_IDS' is defined.

 -- Function: int setgid (gid_t NEWGID)
     Preliminary: | MT-Safe | AS-Unsafe lock | AC-Unsafe lock | *Note
     POSIX Safety Concepts::.

     This function sets both the real and effective group ID of the
     process to NEWGID, provided that the process is privileged.  It
     also deletes the file group ID, if any.

     If the process is not privileged, then `setgid' behaves like
     `setegid'.

     The return values and error conditions for `setgid' are the same
     as those for `seteuid'.

 -- Function: int setregid (gid_t RGID, gid_t EGID)
     Preliminary: | MT-Safe | AS-Unsafe lock | AC-Unsafe lock | *Note
     POSIX Safety Concepts::.

     This function sets the real group ID of the process to RGID and
     the effective group ID to EGID.  If RGID is `-1', it means not to
     change the real group ID; likewise if EGID is `-1', it means not
     to change the effective group ID.

     The `setregid' function is provided for compatibility with 4.3 BSD
     Unix, which does not support file IDs.  You can use this function
     to swap the effective and real group IDs of the process.
     (Privileged processes are not limited to this usage.)  If file IDs
     are supported, you should use that feature instead of using this
     function.  *Note Enable/Disable Setuid::.

     The return values and error conditions for `setregid' are the same
     as those for `setreuid'.

   `setuid' and `setgid' behave differently depending on whether the
effective user ID at the time is zero.  If it is not zero, they behave
like `seteuid' and `setegid'.  If it is, they change both effective and
real IDs and delete the file ID.  To avoid confusion, we recommend you
always use `seteuid' and `setegid' except when you know the effective
user ID is zero and your intent is to change the persona permanently.
This case is rare--most of the programs that need it, such as `login'
and `su', have already been written.

   Note that if your program is setuid to some user other than `root',
there is no way to drop privileges permanently.

   The system also lets privileged processes change their supplementary
group IDs.  To use `setgroups' or `initgroups', your programs should
include the header file `grp.h'.  

 -- Function: int setgroups (size_t COUNT, const gid_t *GROUPS)
     Preliminary: | MT-Safe | AS-Unsafe lock | AC-Unsafe lock | *Note
     POSIX Safety Concepts::.

     This function sets the process's supplementary group IDs.  It can
     only be called from privileged processes.  The COUNT argument
     specifies the number of group IDs in the array GROUPS.

     This function returns `0' if successful and `-1' on error.  The
     following `errno' error conditions are defined for this function:

    `EPERM'
          The calling process is not privileged.

 -- Function: int initgroups (const char *USER, gid_t GROUP)
     Preliminary: | MT-Safe locale | AS-Unsafe dlopen plugin heap lock
     | AC-Unsafe corrupt mem fd lock | *Note POSIX Safety Concepts::.

     The `initgroups' function sets the process's supplementary group
     IDs to be the normal default for the user name USER.  The group
     GROUP is automatically included.

     This function works by scanning the group database for all the
     groups USER belongs to.  It then calls `setgroups' with the list it
     has constructed.

     The return values and error conditions are the same as for
     `setgroups'.

   If you are interested in the groups a particular user belongs to,
but do not want to change the process's supplementary group IDs, you
can use `getgrouplist'.  To use `getgrouplist', your programs should
include the header file `grp.h'.  

 -- Function: int getgrouplist (const char *USER, gid_t GROUP, gid_t
          *GROUPS, int *NGROUPS)
     Preliminary: | MT-Safe locale | AS-Unsafe dlopen plugin heap lock
     | AC-Unsafe corrupt mem fd lock | *Note POSIX Safety Concepts::.

     The `getgrouplist' function scans the group database for all the
     groups USER belongs to.  Up to *NGROUPS group IDs corresponding to
     these groups are stored in the array GROUPS; the return value from
     the function is the number of group IDs actually stored.  If
     *NGROUPS is smaller than the total number of groups found, then
     `getgrouplist' returns a value of `-1' and stores the actual
     number of groups in *NGROUPS.  The group GROUP is automatically
     included in the list of groups returned by `getgrouplist'.

     Here's how to use `getgrouplist' to read all supplementary groups
     for USER:

          gid_t *
          supplementary_groups (char *user)
          {
            int ngroups = 16;
            gid_t *groups
              = (gid_t *) xmalloc (ngroups * sizeof (gid_t));
            struct passwd *pw = getpwnam (user);

            if (pw == NULL)
              return NULL;

            if (getgrouplist (pw->pw_name, pw->pw_gid, groups, &ngroups) < 0)
              {
                groups = xrealloc (ngroups * sizeof (gid_t));
                getgrouplist (pw->pw_name, pw->pw_gid, groups, &ngroups);
              }
            return groups;
          }


File: libc.info,  Node: Enable/Disable Setuid,  Next: Setuid Program Example,  Prev: Setting Groups,  Up: Users and Groups

29.8 Enabling and Disabling Setuid Access
=========================================

A typical setuid program does not need its special access all of the
time.  It's a good idea to turn off this access when it isn't needed,
so it can't possibly give unintended access.

   If the system supports the `_POSIX_SAVED_IDS' feature, you can
accomplish this with `seteuid'.  When the game program starts, its real
user ID is `jdoe', its effective user ID is `games', and its saved user
ID is also `games'.  The program should record both user ID values once
at the beginning, like this:

     user_user_id = getuid ();
     game_user_id = geteuid ();

   Then it can turn off game file access with

     seteuid (user_user_id);

and turn it on with

     seteuid (game_user_id);

Throughout this process, the real user ID remains `jdoe' and the file
user ID remains `games', so the program can always set its effective
user ID to either one.

   On other systems that don't support file user IDs, you can turn
setuid access on and off by using `setreuid' to swap the real and
effective user IDs of the process, as follows:

     setreuid (geteuid (), getuid ());

This special case is always allowed--it cannot fail.

   Why does this have the effect of toggling the setuid access?
Suppose a game program has just started, and its real user ID is `jdoe'
while its effective user ID is `games'.  In this state, the game can
write the scores file.  If it swaps the two uids, the real becomes
`games' and the effective becomes `jdoe'; now the program has only
`jdoe' access.  Another swap brings `games' back to the effective user
ID and restores access to the scores file.

   In order to handle both kinds of systems, test for the saved user ID
feature with a preprocessor conditional, like this:

     #ifdef _POSIX_SAVED_IDS
       seteuid (user_user_id);
     #else
       setreuid (geteuid (), getuid ());
     #endif


File: libc.info,  Node: Setuid Program Example,  Next: Tips for Setuid,  Prev: Enable/Disable Setuid,  Up: Users and Groups

29.9 Setuid Program Example
===========================

Here's an example showing how to set up a program that changes its
effective user ID.

   This is part of a game program called `caber-toss' that manipulates
a file `scores' that should be writable only by the game program
itself.  The program assumes that its executable file will be installed
with the setuid bit set and owned by the same user as the `scores'
file.  Typically, a system administrator will set up an account like
`games' for this purpose.

   The executable file is given mode `4755', so that doing an `ls -l'
on it produces output like:

     -rwsr-xr-x   1 games    184422 Jul 30 15:17 caber-toss

The setuid bit shows up in the file modes as the `s'.

   The scores file is given mode `644', and doing an `ls -l' on it
shows:

     -rw-r--r--  1 games           0 Jul 31 15:33 scores

   Here are the parts of the program that show how to set up the changed
user ID.  This program is conditionalized so that it makes use of the
file IDs feature if it is supported, and otherwise uses `setreuid' to
swap the effective and real user IDs.

     #include <stdio.h>
     #include <sys/types.h>
     #include <unistd.h>
     #include <stdlib.h>


     /* Remember the effective and real UIDs. */

     static uid_t euid, ruid;


     /* Restore the effective UID to its original value. */

     void
     do_setuid (void)
     {
       int status;

     #ifdef _POSIX_SAVED_IDS
       status = seteuid (euid);
     #else
       status = setreuid (ruid, euid);
     #endif
       if (status < 0) {
         fprintf (stderr, "Couldn't set uid.\n");
         exit (status);
         }
     }


     /* Set the effective UID to the real UID. */

     void
     undo_setuid (void)
     {
       int status;

     #ifdef _POSIX_SAVED_IDS
       status = seteuid (ruid);
     #else
       status = setreuid (euid, ruid);
     #endif
       if (status < 0) {
         fprintf (stderr, "Couldn't set uid.\n");
         exit (status);
         }
     }

     /* Main program. */

     int
     main (void)
     {
       /* Remember the real and effective user IDs.  */
       ruid = getuid ();
       euid = geteuid ();
       undo_setuid ();

       /* Do the game and record the score.  */
       ...
     }

   Notice how the first thing the `main' function does is to set the
effective user ID back to the real user ID.  This is so that any other
file accesses that are performed while the user is playing the game use
the real user ID for determining permissions.  Only when the program
needs to open the scores file does it switch back to the file user ID,
like this:

     /* Record the score. */

     int
     record_score (int score)
     {
       FILE *stream;
       char *myname;

       /* Open the scores file. */
       do_setuid ();
       stream = fopen (SCORES_FILE, "a");
       undo_setuid ();

       /* Write the score to the file. */
       if (stream)
         {
           myname = cuserid (NULL);
           if (score < 0)
             fprintf (stream, "%10s: Couldn't lift the caber.\n", myname);
           else
             fprintf (stream, "%10s: %d feet.\n", myname, score);
           fclose (stream);
           return 0;
         }
       else
         return -1;
     }


File: libc.info,  Node: Tips for Setuid,  Next: Who Logged In,  Prev: Setuid Program Example,  Up: Users and Groups

29.10 Tips for Writing Setuid Programs
======================================

It is easy for setuid programs to give the user access that isn't
intended--in fact, if you want to avoid this, you need to be careful.
Here are some guidelines for preventing unintended access and
minimizing its consequences when it does occur:

   * Don't have `setuid' programs with privileged user IDs such as
     `root' unless it is absolutely necessary.  If the resource is
     specific to your particular program, it's better to define a new,
     nonprivileged user ID or group ID just to manage that resource.
     It's better if you can write your program to use a special group
     than a special user.

   * Be cautious about using the `exec' functions in combination with
     changing the effective user ID.  Don't let users of your program
     execute arbitrary programs under a changed user ID.  Executing a
     shell is especially bad news. Less obviously, the `execlp' and
     `execvp' functions are a potential risk (since the program they
     execute depends on the user's `PATH' environment variable).

     If you must `exec' another program under a changed ID, specify an
     absolute file name (*note File Name Resolution::) for the
     executable, and make sure that the protections on that executable
     and _all_ containing directories are such that ordinary users
     cannot replace it with some other program.

     You should also check the arguments passed to the program to make
     sure they do not have unexpected effects.  Likewise, you should
     examine the environment variables.  Decide which arguments and
     variables are safe, and reject all others.

     You should never use `system' in a privileged program, because it
     invokes a shell.

   * Only use the user ID controlling the resource in the part of the
     program that actually uses that resource.  When you're finished
     with it, restore the effective user ID back to the actual user's
     user ID.  *Note Enable/Disable Setuid::.

   * If the `setuid' part of your program needs to access other files
     besides the controlled resource, it should verify that the real
     user would ordinarily have permission to access those files.  You
     can use the `access' function (*note Access Permission::) to check
     this; it uses the real user and group IDs, rather than the
     effective IDs.


File: libc.info,  Node: Who Logged In,  Next: User Accounting Database,  Prev: Tips for Setuid,  Up: Users and Groups

29.11 Identifying Who Logged In
===============================

You can use the functions listed in this section to determine the login
name of the user who is running a process, and the name of the user who
logged in the current session.  See also the function `getuid' and
friends (*note Reading Persona::).  How this information is collected by
the system and how to control/add/remove information from the background
storage is described in *note User Accounting Database::.

   The `getlogin' function is declared in `unistd.h', while `cuserid'
and `L_cuserid' are declared in `stdio.h'.  

 -- Function: char * getlogin (void)
     Preliminary: | MT-Unsafe race:getlogin race:utent sig:ALRM timer
     locale | AS-Unsafe dlopen plugin heap lock | AC-Unsafe corrupt
     lock fd mem | *Note POSIX Safety Concepts::.

     The `getlogin' function returns a pointer to a string containing
     the name of the user logged in on the controlling terminal of the
     process, or a null pointer if this information cannot be
     determined.  The string is statically allocated and might be
     overwritten on subsequent calls to this function or to `cuserid'.

 -- Function: char * cuserid (char *STRING)
     Preliminary: | MT-Safe locale | AS-Unsafe dlopen plugin heap lock
     | AC-Unsafe corrupt lock fd mem | *Note POSIX Safety Concepts::.

     The `cuserid' function returns a pointer to a string containing a
     user name associated with the effective ID of the process.  If
     STRING is not a null pointer, it should be an array that can hold
     at least `L_cuserid' characters; the string is returned in this
     array.  Otherwise, a pointer to a string in a static area is
     returned.  This string is statically allocated and might be
     overwritten on subsequent calls to this function or to `getlogin'.

     The use of this function is deprecated since it is marked to be
     withdrawn in XPG4.2 and has already been removed from newer
     revisions of POSIX.1.

 -- Macro: int L_cuserid
     An integer constant that indicates how long an array you might
     need to store a user name.

   These functions let your program identify positively the user who is
running or the user who logged in this session.  (These can differ when
setuid programs are involved; see *note Process Persona::.)  The user
cannot do anything to fool these functions.

   For most purposes, it is more useful to use the environment variable
`LOGNAME' to find out who the user is.  This is more flexible precisely
because the user can set `LOGNAME' arbitrarily.  *Note Standard
Environment::.


File: libc.info,  Node: User Accounting Database,  Next: User Database,  Prev: Who Logged In,  Up: Users and Groups

29.12 The User Accounting Database
==================================

Most Unix-like operating systems keep track of logged in users by
maintaining a user accounting database.  This user accounting database
stores for each terminal, who has logged on, at what time, the process
ID of the user's login shell, etc., etc., but also stores information
about the run level of the system, the time of the last system reboot,
and possibly more.

   The user accounting database typically lives in `/etc/utmp',
`/var/adm/utmp' or `/var/run/utmp'.  However, these files should
*never* be accessed directly.  For reading information from and writing
information to the user accounting database, the functions described in
this section should be used.

* Menu:

* Manipulating the Database::   Scanning and modifying the user
                                 accounting database.
* XPG Functions::               A standardized way for doing the same thing.
* Logging In and Out::          Functions from BSD that modify the user
                                 accounting database.


File: libc.info,  Node: Manipulating the Database,  Next: XPG Functions,  Up: User Accounting Database

29.12.1 Manipulating the User Accounting Database
-------------------------------------------------

These functions and the corresponding data structures are declared in
the header file `utmp.h'.  

 -- Data Type: struct exit_status
     The `exit_status' data structure is used to hold information about
     the exit status of processes marked as `DEAD_PROCESS' in the user
     accounting database.

    `short int e_termination'
          The exit status of the process.

    `short int e_exit'
          The exit status of the process.

 -- Data Type: struct utmp
     The `utmp' data structure is used to hold information about entries
     in the user accounting database.  On GNU systems it has the
     following members:

    `short int ut_type'
          Specifies the type of login; one of `EMPTY', `RUN_LVL',
          `BOOT_TIME', `OLD_TIME', `NEW_TIME', `INIT_PROCESS',
          `LOGIN_PROCESS', `USER_PROCESS', `DEAD_PROCESS' or
          `ACCOUNTING'.

    `pid_t ut_pid'
          The process ID number of the login process.

    `char ut_line[]'
          The device name of the tty (without `/dev/').

    `char ut_id[]'
          The inittab ID of the process.

    `char ut_user[]'
          The user's login name.

    `char ut_host[]'
          The name of the host from which the user logged in.

    `struct exit_status ut_exit'
          The exit status of a process marked as `DEAD_PROCESS'.

    `long ut_session'
          The Session ID, used for windowing.

    `struct timeval ut_tv'
          Time the entry was made.  For entries of type `OLD_TIME' this
          is the time when the system clock changed, and for entries of
          type `NEW_TIME' this is the time the system clock was set to.

    `int32_t ut_addr_v6[4]'
          The Internet address of a remote host.

   The `ut_type', `ut_pid', `ut_id', `ut_tv', and `ut_host' fields are
not available on all systems.  Portable applications therefore should
be prepared for these situations.  To help doing this the `utmp.h'
header provides macros `_HAVE_UT_TYPE', `_HAVE_UT_PID', `_HAVE_UT_ID',
`_HAVE_UT_TV', and `_HAVE_UT_HOST' if the respective field is
available.  The programmer can handle the situations by using `#ifdef'
in the program code.

   The following macros are defined for use as values for the `ut_type'
member of the `utmp' structure.  The values are integer constants.

`EMPTY'
     This macro is used to indicate that the entry contains no valid
     user accounting information.

`RUN_LVL'
     This macro is used to identify the systems runlevel.

`BOOT_TIME'
     This macro is used to identify the time of system boot.

`OLD_TIME'
     This macro is used to identify the time when the system clock
     changed.

`NEW_TIME'
     This macro is used to identify the time after the system changed.

`INIT_PROCESS'
     This macro is used to identify a process spawned by the init
     process.

`LOGIN_PROCESS'
     This macro is used to identify the session leader of a logged in
     user.

`USER_PROCESS'
     This macro is used to identify a user process.

`DEAD_PROCESS'
     This macro is used to identify a terminated process.

`ACCOUNTING'
     ???

   The size of the `ut_line', `ut_id', `ut_user' and `ut_host' arrays
can be found using the `sizeof' operator.

   Many older systems have, instead of an `ut_tv' member, an `ut_time'
member, usually of type `time_t', for representing the time associated
with the entry.  Therefore, for backwards compatibility only, `utmp.h'
defines `ut_time' as an alias for `ut_tv.tv_sec'.

 -- Function: void setutent (void)
     Preliminary: | MT-Unsafe race:utent | AS-Unsafe lock | AC-Unsafe
     lock fd | *Note POSIX Safety Concepts::.

     This function opens the user accounting database to begin scanning
     it.  You can then call `getutent', `getutid' or `getutline' to
     read entries and `pututline' to write entries.

     If the database is already open, it resets the input to the
     beginning of the database.

 -- Function: struct utmp * getutent (void)
     Preliminary: | MT-Unsafe init race:utent race:utentbuf sig:ALRM
     timer | AS-Unsafe heap lock | AC-Unsafe lock fd mem | *Note POSIX
     Safety Concepts::.

     The `getutent' function reads the next entry from the user
     accounting database.  It returns a pointer to the entry, which is
     statically allocated and may be overwritten by subsequent calls to
     `getutent'.  You must copy the contents of the structure if you
     wish to save the information or you can use the `getutent_r'
     function which stores the data in a user-provided buffer.

     A null pointer is returned in case no further entry is available.

 -- Function: void endutent (void)
     Preliminary: | MT-Unsafe race:utent | AS-Unsafe lock | AC-Unsafe
     lock fd | *Note POSIX Safety Concepts::.

     This function closes the user accounting database.

 -- Function: struct utmp * getutid (const struct utmp *ID)
     Preliminary: | MT-Unsafe init race:utent sig:ALRM timer |
     AS-Unsafe lock heap | AC-Unsafe lock mem fd | *Note POSIX Safety
     Concepts::.

     This function searches forward from the current point in the
     database for an entry that matches ID.  If the `ut_type' member of
     the ID structure is one of `RUN_LVL', `BOOT_TIME', `OLD_TIME' or
     `NEW_TIME' the entries match if the `ut_type' members are
     identical.  If the `ut_type' member of the ID structure is
     `INIT_PROCESS', `LOGIN_PROCESS', `USER_PROCESS' or `DEAD_PROCESS',
     the entries match if the `ut_type' member of the entry read from
     the database is one of these four, and the `ut_id' members match.
     However if the `ut_id' member of either the ID structure or the
     entry read from the database is empty it checks if the `ut_line'
     members match instead.  If a matching entry is found, `getutid'
     returns a pointer to the entry, which is statically allocated, and
     may be overwritten by a subsequent call to `getutent', `getutid'
     or `getutline'.  You must copy the contents of the structure if
     you wish to save the information.

     A null pointer is returned in case the end of the database is
     reached without a match.

     The `getutid' function may cache the last read entry.  Therefore,
     if you are using `getutid' to search for multiple occurrences, it
     is necessary to zero out the static data after each call.
     Otherwise `getutid' could just return a pointer to the same entry
     over and over again.

 -- Function: struct utmp * getutline (const struct utmp *LINE)
     Preliminary: | MT-Unsafe init race:utent sig:ALRM timer |
     AS-Unsafe heap lock | AC-Unsafe lock fd mem | *Note POSIX Safety
     Concepts::.

     This function searches forward from the current point in the
     database until it finds an entry whose `ut_type' value is
     `LOGIN_PROCESS' or `USER_PROCESS', and whose `ut_line' member
     matches the `ut_line' member of the LINE structure.  If it finds
     such an entry, it returns a pointer to the entry which is
     statically allocated, and may be overwritten by a subsequent call
     to `getutent', `getutid' or `getutline'.  You must copy the
     contents of the structure if you wish to save the information.

     A null pointer is returned in case the end of the database is
     reached without a match.

     The `getutline' function may cache the last read entry.  Therefore
     if you are using `getutline' to search for multiple occurrences, it
     is necessary to zero out the static data after each call.
     Otherwise `getutline' could just return a pointer to the same
     entry over and over again.

 -- Function: struct utmp * pututline (const struct utmp *UTMP)
     Preliminary: | MT-Unsafe race:utent sig:ALRM timer | AS-Unsafe lock
     | AC-Unsafe lock fd | *Note POSIX Safety Concepts::.

     The `pututline' function inserts the entry `*UTMP' at the
     appropriate place in the user accounting database.  If it finds
     that it is not already at the correct place in the database, it
     uses `getutid' to search for the position to insert the entry,
     however this will not modify the static structure returned by
     `getutent', `getutid' and `getutline'.  If this search fails, the
     entry is appended to the database.

     The `pututline' function returns a pointer to a copy of the entry
     inserted in the user accounting database, or a null pointer if the
     entry could not be added.  The following `errno' error conditions
     are defined for this function:

    `EPERM'
          The process does not have the appropriate privileges; you
          cannot modify the user accounting database.

   All the `get*' functions mentioned before store the information they
return in a static buffer.  This can be a problem in multi-threaded
programs since the data returned for the request is overwritten by the
return value data in another thread.  Therefore the GNU C Library
provides as extensions three more functions which return the data in a
user-provided buffer.

 -- Function: int getutent_r (struct utmp *BUFFER, struct utmp **RESULT)
     Preliminary: | MT-Unsafe race:utent sig:ALRM timer | AS-Unsafe lock
     | AC-Unsafe lock fd | *Note POSIX Safety Concepts::.

     The `getutent_r' is equivalent to the `getutent' function.  It
     returns the next entry from the database.  But instead of storing
     the information in a static buffer it stores it in the buffer
     pointed to by the parameter BUFFER.

     If the call was successful, the function returns `0' and the
     pointer variable pointed to by the parameter RESULT contains a
     pointer to the buffer which contains the result (this is most
     probably the same value as BUFFER).  If something went wrong
     during the execution of `getutent_r' the function returns `-1'.

     This function is a GNU extension.

 -- Function: int getutid_r (const struct utmp *ID, struct utmp
          *BUFFER, struct utmp **RESULT)
     Preliminary: | MT-Unsafe race:utent sig:ALRM timer | AS-Unsafe lock
     | AC-Unsafe lock fd | *Note POSIX Safety Concepts::.

     This function retrieves just like `getutid' the next entry matching
     the information stored in ID.  But the result is stored in the
     buffer pointed to by the parameter BUFFER.

     If successful the function returns `0' and the pointer variable
     pointed to by the parameter RESULT contains a pointer to the
     buffer with the result (probably the same as RESULT.  If not
     successful the function return `-1'.

     This function is a GNU extension.

 -- Function: int getutline_r (const struct utmp *LINE, struct utmp
          *BUFFER, struct utmp **RESULT)
     Preliminary: | MT-Unsafe race:utent sig:ALRM timer | AS-Unsafe lock
     | AC-Unsafe lock fd | *Note POSIX Safety Concepts::.

     This function retrieves just like `getutline' the next entry
     matching the information stored in LINE.  But the result is stored
     in the buffer pointed to by the parameter BUFFER.

     If successful the function returns `0' and the pointer variable
     pointed to by the parameter RESULT contains a pointer to the
     buffer with the result (probably the same as RESULT.  If not
     successful the function return `-1'.

     This function is a GNU extension.

   In addition to the user accounting database, most systems keep a
number of similar databases.  For example most systems keep a log file
with all previous logins (usually in `/etc/wtmp' or `/var/log/wtmp').

   For specifying which database to examine, the following function
should be used.

 -- Function: int utmpname (const char *FILE)
     Preliminary: | MT-Unsafe race:utent | AS-Unsafe lock heap |
     AC-Unsafe lock mem | *Note POSIX Safety Concepts::.

     The `utmpname' function changes the name of the database to be
     examined to FILE, and closes any previously opened database.  By
     default `getutent', `getutid', `getutline' and `pututline' read
     from and write to the user accounting database.

     The following macros are defined for use as the FILE argument:

      -- Macro: char * _PATH_UTMP
          This macro is used to specify the user accounting database.

      -- Macro: char * _PATH_WTMP
          This macro is used to specify the user accounting log file.

     The `utmpname' function returns a value of `0' if the new name was
     successfully stored, and a value of `-1' to indicate an error.
     Note that `utmpname' does not try to open the database, and that
     therefore the return value does not say anything about whether the
     database can be successfully opened.

   Specially for maintaining log-like databases the GNU C Library
provides the following function:

 -- Function: void updwtmp (const char *WTMP_FILE, const struct utmp
          *UTMP)
     Preliminary: | MT-Unsafe sig:ALRM timer | AS-Unsafe | AC-Unsafe fd
     | *Note POSIX Safety Concepts::.

     The `updwtmp' function appends the entry *UTMP to the database
     specified by WTMP_FILE.  For possible values for the WTMP_FILE
     argument see the `utmpname' function.

   *Portability Note:* Although many operating systems provide a subset
of these functions, they are not standardized.  There are often subtle
differences in the return types, and there are considerable differences
between the various definitions of `struct utmp'.  When programming for
the GNU C Library, it is probably best to stick with the functions
described in this section.  If however, you want your program to be
portable, consider using the XPG functions described in *note XPG
Functions::, or take a look at the BSD compatible functions in *note
Logging In and Out::.


File: libc.info,  Node: XPG Functions,  Next: Logging In and Out,  Prev: Manipulating the Database,  Up: User Accounting Database

29.12.2 XPG User Accounting Database Functions
----------------------------------------------

These functions, described in the X/Open Portability Guide, are declared
in the header file `utmpx.h'.  

 -- Data Type: struct utmpx
     The `utmpx' data structure contains at least the following members:

    `short int ut_type'
          Specifies the type of login; one of `EMPTY', `RUN_LVL',
          `BOOT_TIME', `OLD_TIME', `NEW_TIME', `INIT_PROCESS',
          `LOGIN_PROCESS', `USER_PROCESS' or `DEAD_PROCESS'.

    `pid_t ut_pid'
          The process ID number of the login process.

    `char ut_line[]'
          The device name of the tty (without `/dev/').

    `char ut_id[]'
          The inittab ID of the process.

    `char ut_user[]'
          The user's login name.

    `struct timeval ut_tv'
          Time the entry was made.  For entries of type `OLD_TIME' this
          is the time when the system clock changed, and for entries of
          type `NEW_TIME' this is the time the system clock was set to.
     In the GNU C Library, `struct utmpx' is identical to `struct utmp'
     except for the fact that including `utmpx.h' does not make visible
     the declaration of `struct exit_status'.

   The following macros are defined for use as values for the `ut_type'
member of the `utmpx' structure.  The values are integer constants and
are, in the GNU C Library, identical to the definitions in `utmp.h'.

`EMPTY'
     This macro is used to indicate that the entry contains no valid
     user accounting information.

`RUN_LVL'
     This macro is used to identify the systems runlevel.

`BOOT_TIME'
     This macro is used to identify the time of system boot.

`OLD_TIME'
     This macro is used to identify the time when the system clock
     changed.

`NEW_TIME'
     This macro is used to identify the time after the system changed.

`INIT_PROCESS'
     This macro is used to identify a process spawned by the init
     process.

`LOGIN_PROCESS'
     This macro is used to identify the session leader of a logged in
     user.

`USER_PROCESS'
     This macro is used to identify a user process.

`DEAD_PROCESS'
     This macro is used to identify a terminated process.

   The size of the `ut_line', `ut_id' and `ut_user' arrays can be found
using the `sizeof' operator.

 -- Function: void setutxent (void)
     Preliminary: | MT-Unsafe race:utent | AS-Unsafe lock | AC-Unsafe
     lock fd | *Note POSIX Safety Concepts::.

     This function is similar to `setutent'.  In the GNU C Library it is
     simply an alias for `setutent'.

 -- Function: struct utmpx * getutxent (void)
     Preliminary: | MT-Unsafe init race:utent sig:ALRM timer |
     AS-Unsafe heap lock | AC-Unsafe lock fd mem | *Note POSIX Safety
     Concepts::.

     The `getutxent' function is similar to `getutent', but returns a
     pointer to a `struct utmpx' instead of `struct utmp'.  In the GNU
     C Library it simply is an alias for `getutent'.

 -- Function: void endutxent (void)
     Preliminary: | MT-Unsafe race:utent | AS-Unsafe lock | AC-Unsafe
     lock | *Note POSIX Safety Concepts::.

     This function is similar to `endutent'.  In the GNU C Library it is
     simply an alias for `endutent'.

 -- Function: struct utmpx * getutxid (const struct utmpx *ID)
     Preliminary: | MT-Unsafe init race:utent sig:ALRM timer |
     AS-Unsafe lock heap | AC-Unsafe lock mem fd | *Note POSIX Safety
     Concepts::.

     This function is similar to `getutid', but uses `struct utmpx'
     instead of `struct utmp'.  In the GNU C Library it is simply an
     alias for `getutid'.

 -- Function: struct utmpx * getutxline (const struct utmpx *LINE)
     Preliminary: | MT-Unsafe init race:utent sig:ALRM timer |
     AS-Unsafe heap lock | AC-Unsafe lock fd mem | *Note POSIX Safety
     Concepts::.

     This function is similar to `getutid', but uses `struct utmpx'
     instead of `struct utmp'.  In the GNU C Library it is simply an
     alias for `getutline'.

 -- Function: struct utmpx * pututxline (const struct utmpx *UTMP)
     Preliminary: | MT-Unsafe race:utent sig:ALRM timer | AS-Unsafe lock
     | AC-Unsafe lock fd | *Note POSIX Safety Concepts::.

     The `pututxline' function is functionally identical to
     `pututline', but uses `struct utmpx' instead of `struct utmp'.  In
     the GNU C Library, `pututxline' is simply an alias for `pututline'.

 -- Function: int utmpxname (const char *FILE)
     Preliminary: | MT-Unsafe race:utent | AS-Unsafe lock heap |
     AC-Unsafe lock mem | *Note POSIX Safety Concepts::.

     The `utmpxname' function is functionally identical to `utmpname'.
     In the GNU C Library, `utmpxname' is simply an alias for
     `utmpname'.

   You can translate between a traditional `struct utmp' and an XPG
`struct utmpx' with the following functions.  In the GNU C Library,
these functions are merely copies, since the two structures are
identical.

 -- Function: int getutmp (const struct utmpx *UTMPX, struct utmp *UTMP)
     Preliminary: | MT-Safe | AS-Safe | AC-Safe | *Note POSIX Safety
     Concepts::.

     `getutmp' copies the information, insofar as the structures are
     compatible, from UTMPX to UTMP.

 -- Function: int getutmpx (const struct utmp *UTMP, struct utmpx
          *UTMPX)
     Preliminary: | MT-Safe | AS-Safe | AC-Safe | *Note POSIX Safety
     Concepts::.

     `getutmpx' copies the information, insofar as the structures are
     compatible, from UTMP to UTMPX.


File: libc.info,  Node: Logging In and Out,  Prev: XPG Functions,  Up: User Accounting Database

29.12.3 Logging In and Out
--------------------------

These functions, derived from BSD, are available in the separate
`libutil' library, and declared in `utmp.h'.  

   Note that the `ut_user' member of `struct utmp' is called `ut_name'
in BSD.  Therefore, `ut_name' is defined as an alias for `ut_user' in
`utmp.h'.

 -- Function: int login_tty (int FILEDES)
     Preliminary: | MT-Unsafe race:ttyname | AS-Unsafe heap lock |
     AC-Unsafe lock fd mem | *Note POSIX Safety Concepts::.

     This function makes FILEDES the controlling terminal of the
     current process, redirects standard input, standard output and
     standard error output to this terminal, and closes FILEDES.

     This function returns `0' on successful completion, and `-1' on
     error.

 -- Function: void login (const struct utmp *ENTRY)
     Preliminary: | MT-Unsafe race:utent sig:ALRM timer | AS-Unsafe
     lock heap | AC-Unsafe lock corrupt fd mem | *Note POSIX Safety
     Concepts::.

     The `login' functions inserts an entry into the user accounting
     database.  The `ut_line' member is set to the name of the terminal
     on standard input.  If standard input is not a terminal `login'
     uses standard output or standard error output to determine the
     name of the terminal.  If `struct utmp' has a `ut_type' member,
     `login' sets it to `USER_PROCESS', and if there is an `ut_pid'
     member, it will be set to the process ID of the current process.
     The remaining entries are copied from ENTRY.

     A copy of the entry is written to the user accounting log file.

 -- Function: int logout (const char *UT_LINE)
     Preliminary: | MT-Unsafe race:utent sig:ALRM timer | AS-Unsafe
     lock heap | AC-Unsafe lock fd mem | *Note POSIX Safety Concepts::.

     This function modifies the user accounting database to indicate
     that the user on UT_LINE has logged out.

     The `logout' function returns `1' if the entry was successfully
     written to the database, or `0' on error.

 -- Function: void logwtmp (const char *UT_LINE, const char *UT_NAME,
          const char *UT_HOST)
     Preliminary: | MT-Unsafe sig:ALRM timer | AS-Unsafe | AC-Unsafe fd
     | *Note POSIX Safety Concepts::.

     The `logwtmp' function appends an entry to the user accounting log
     file, for the current time and the information provided in the
     UT_LINE, UT_NAME and UT_HOST arguments.

   *Portability Note:* The BSD `struct utmp' only has the `ut_line',
`ut_name', `ut_host' and `ut_time' members.  Older systems do not even
have the `ut_host' member.


File: libc.info,  Node: User Database,  Next: Group Database,  Prev: User Accounting Database,  Up: Users and Groups

29.13 User Database
===================

This section describes how to search and scan the database of registered
users.  The database itself is kept in the file `/etc/passwd' on most
systems, but on some systems a special network server gives access to
it.

* Menu:

* User Data Structure::         What each user record contains.
* Lookup User::                 How to look for a particular user.
* Scanning All Users::          Scanning the list of all users, one by one.
* Writing a User Entry::        How a program can rewrite a user's record.


File: libc.info,  Node: User Data Structure,  Next: Lookup User,  Up: User Database

29.13.1 The Data Structure that Describes a User
------------------------------------------------

The functions and data structures for accessing the system user database
are declared in the header file `pwd.h'.  

 -- Data Type: struct passwd
     The `passwd' data structure is used to hold information about
     entries in the system user data base.  It has at least the
     following members:

    `char *pw_name'
          The user's login name.

    `char *pw_passwd.'
          The encrypted password string.

    `uid_t pw_uid'
          The user ID number.

    `gid_t pw_gid'
          The user's default group ID number.

    `char *pw_gecos'
          A string typically containing the user's real name, and
          possibly other information such as a phone number.

    `char *pw_dir'
          The user's home directory, or initial working directory.
          This might be a null pointer, in which case the
          interpretation is system-dependent.

    `char *pw_shell'
          The user's default shell, or the initial program run when the
          user logs in.  This might be a null pointer, indicating that
          the system default should be used.


File: libc.info,  Node: Lookup User,  Next: Scanning All Users,  Prev: User Data Structure,  Up: User Database

29.13.2 Looking Up One User
---------------------------

You can search the system user database for information about a
specific user using `getpwuid' or `getpwnam'.  These functions are
declared in `pwd.h'.

 -- Function: struct passwd * getpwuid (uid_t UID)
     Preliminary: | MT-Unsafe race:pwuid locale | AS-Unsafe dlopen
     plugin heap lock | AC-Unsafe corrupt lock fd mem | *Note POSIX
     Safety Concepts::.

     This function returns a pointer to a statically-allocated structure
     containing information about the user whose user ID is UID.  This
     structure may be overwritten on subsequent calls to `getpwuid'.

     A null pointer value indicates there is no user in the data base
     with user ID UID.

 -- Function: int getpwuid_r (uid_t UID, struct passwd *RESULT_BUF,
          char *BUFFER, size_t BUFLEN, struct passwd **RESULT)
     Preliminary: | MT-Safe locale | AS-Unsafe dlopen plugin heap lock
     | AC-Unsafe corrupt lock fd mem | *Note POSIX Safety Concepts::.

     This function is similar to `getpwuid' in that it returns
     information about the user whose user ID is UID.  However, it
     fills the user supplied structure pointed to by RESULT_BUF with
     the information instead of using a static buffer.  The first
     BUFLEN bytes of the additional buffer pointed to by BUFFER are
     used to contain additional information, normally strings which are
     pointed to by the elements of the result structure.

     If a user with ID UID is found, the pointer returned in RESULT
     points to the record which contains the wanted data (i.e., RESULT
     contains the value RESULT_BUF).  If no user is found or if an
     error occurred, the pointer returned in RESULT is a null pointer.
     The function returns zero or an error code.  If the buffer BUFFER
     is too small to contain all the needed information, the error code
     `ERANGE' is returned and ERRNO is set to `ERANGE'.

 -- Function: struct passwd * getpwnam (const char *NAME)
     Preliminary: | MT-Unsafe race:pwnam locale | AS-Unsafe dlopen
     plugin heap lock | AC-Unsafe corrupt lock fd mem | *Note POSIX
     Safety Concepts::.

     This function returns a pointer to a statically-allocated structure
     containing information about the user whose user name is NAME.
     This structure may be overwritten on subsequent calls to
     `getpwnam'.

     A null pointer return indicates there is no user named NAME.

 -- Function: int getpwnam_r (const char *NAME, struct passwd
          *RESULT_BUF, char *BUFFER, size_t BUFLEN, struct passwd
          **RESULT)
     Preliminary: | MT-Safe locale | AS-Unsafe dlopen plugin heap lock
     | AC-Unsafe corrupt lock fd mem | *Note POSIX Safety Concepts::.

     This function is similar to `getpwnam' in that is returns
     information about the user whose user name is NAME.  However, like
     `getpwuid_r', it fills the user supplied buffers in RESULT_BUF and
     BUFFER with the information instead of using a static buffer.

     The return values are the same as for `getpwuid_r'.


File: libc.info,  Node: Scanning All Users,  Next: Writing a User Entry,  Prev: Lookup User,  Up: User Database

29.13.3 Scanning the List of All Users
--------------------------------------

This section explains how a program can read the list of all users in
the system, one user at a time.  The functions described here are
declared in `pwd.h'.

   You can use the `fgetpwent' function to read user entries from a
particular file.

 -- Function: struct passwd * fgetpwent (FILE *STREAM)
     Preliminary: | MT-Unsafe race:fpwent | AS-Unsafe corrupt lock |
     AC-Unsafe corrupt lock | *Note POSIX Safety Concepts::.

     This function reads the next user entry from STREAM and returns a
     pointer to the entry.  The structure is statically allocated and is
     rewritten on subsequent calls to `fgetpwent'.  You must copy the
     contents of the structure if you wish to save the information.

     The stream must correspond to a file in the same format as the
     standard password database file.

 -- Function: int fgetpwent_r (FILE *STREAM, struct passwd *RESULT_BUF,
          char *BUFFER, size_t BUFLEN, struct passwd **RESULT)
     Preliminary: | MT-Safe | AS-Unsafe corrupt | AC-Unsafe corrupt lock
     | *Note POSIX Safety Concepts::.

     This function is similar to `fgetpwent' in that it reads the next
     user entry from STREAM.  But the result is returned in the
     structure pointed to by RESULT_BUF.  The first BUFLEN bytes of the
     additional buffer pointed to by BUFFER are used to contain
     additional information, normally strings which are pointed to by
     the elements of the result structure.

     The stream must correspond to a file in the same format as the
     standard password database file.

     If the function returns zero RESULT points to the structure with
     the wanted data (normally this is in RESULT_BUF).  If errors
     occurred the return value is nonzero and RESULT contains a null
     pointer.

   The way to scan all the entries in the user database is with
`setpwent', `getpwent', and `endpwent'.

 -- Function: void setpwent (void)
     Preliminary: | MT-Unsafe race:pwent locale | AS-Unsafe dlopen
     plugin heap lock | AC-Unsafe corrupt lock fd mem | *Note POSIX
     Safety Concepts::.

     This function initializes a stream which `getpwent' and
     `getpwent_r' use to read the user database.

 -- Function: struct passwd * getpwent (void)
     Preliminary: | MT-Unsafe race:pwent race:pwentbuf locale |
     AS-Unsafe dlopen plugin heap lock | AC-Unsafe corrupt lock fd mem
     | *Note POSIX Safety Concepts::.

     The `getpwent' function reads the next entry from the stream
     initialized by `setpwent'.  It returns a pointer to the entry.  The
     structure is statically allocated and is rewritten on subsequent
     calls to `getpwent'.  You must copy the contents of the structure
     if you wish to save the information.

     A null pointer is returned when no more entries are available.

 -- Function: int getpwent_r (struct passwd *RESULT_BUF, char *BUFFER,
          size_t BUFLEN, struct passwd **RESULT)
     Preliminary: | MT-Unsafe race:pwent locale | AS-Unsafe dlopen
     plugin heap lock | AC-Unsafe corrupt lock fd mem | *Note POSIX
     Safety Concepts::.

     This function is similar to `getpwent' in that it returns the next
     entry from the stream initialized by `setpwent'.  Like
     `fgetpwent_r', it uses the user-supplied buffers in RESULT_BUF and
     BUFFER to return the information requested.

     The return values are the same as for `fgetpwent_r'.


 -- Function: void endpwent (void)
     Preliminary: | MT-Unsafe race:pwent locale | AS-Unsafe dlopen
     plugin heap lock | AC-Unsafe corrupt lock fd mem | *Note POSIX
     Safety Concepts::.

     This function closes the internal stream used by `getpwent' or
     `getpwent_r'.


File: libc.info,  Node: Writing a User Entry,  Prev: Scanning All Users,  Up: User Database

29.13.4 Writing a User Entry
----------------------------

 -- Function: int putpwent (const struct passwd *P, FILE *STREAM)
     Preliminary: | MT-Safe locale | AS-Unsafe corrupt | AC-Unsafe lock
     corrupt | *Note POSIX Safety Concepts::.

     This function writes the user entry `*P' to the stream STREAM, in
     the format used for the standard user database file.  The return
     value is zero on success and nonzero on failure.

     This function exists for compatibility with SVID.  We recommend
     that you avoid using it, because it makes sense only on the
     assumption that the `struct passwd' structure has no members
     except the standard ones; on a system which merges the traditional
     Unix data base with other extended information about users, adding
     an entry using this function would inevitably leave out much of
     the important information.

     The group and user ID fields are left empty if the group or user
     name starts with a - or +.

     The function `putpwent' is declared in `pwd.h'.


File: libc.info,  Node: Group Database,  Next: Database Example,  Prev: User Database,  Up: Users and Groups

29.14 Group Database
====================

This section describes how to search and scan the database of
registered groups.  The database itself is kept in the file
`/etc/group' on most systems, but on some systems a special network
service provides access to it.

* Menu:

* Group Data Structure::        What each group record contains.
* Lookup Group::                How to look for a particular group.
* Scanning All Groups::         Scanning the list of all groups.


File: libc.info,  Node: Group Data Structure,  Next: Lookup Group,  Up: Group Database

29.14.1 The Data Structure for a Group
--------------------------------------

The functions and data structures for accessing the system group
database are declared in the header file `grp.h'.  

 -- Data Type: struct group
     The `group' structure is used to hold information about an entry in
     the system group database.  It has at least the following members:

    `char *gr_name'
          The name of the group.

    `gid_t gr_gid'
          The group ID of the group.

    `char **gr_mem'
          A vector of pointers to the names of users in the group.
          Each user name is a null-terminated string, and the vector
          itself is terminated by a null pointer.


File: libc.info,  Node: Lookup Group,  Next: Scanning All Groups,  Prev: Group Data Structure,  Up: Group Database

29.14.2 Looking Up One Group
----------------------------

You can search the group database for information about a specific
group using `getgrgid' or `getgrnam'.  These functions are declared in
`grp.h'.

 -- Function: struct group * getgrgid (gid_t GID)
     Preliminary: | MT-Unsafe race:grgid locale | AS-Unsafe dlopen
     plugin heap lock | AC-Unsafe corrupt lock fd mem | *Note POSIX
     Safety Concepts::.

     This function returns a pointer to a statically-allocated structure
     containing information about the group whose group ID is GID.
     This structure may be overwritten by subsequent calls to
     `getgrgid'.

     A null pointer indicates there is no group with ID GID.

 -- Function: int getgrgid_r (gid_t GID, struct group *RESULT_BUF, char
          *BUFFER, size_t BUFLEN, struct group **RESULT)
     Preliminary: | MT-Safe locale | AS-Unsafe dlopen plugin heap lock
     | AC-Unsafe corrupt lock fd mem | *Note POSIX Safety Concepts::.

     This function is similar to `getgrgid' in that it returns
     information about the group whose group ID is GID.  However, it
     fills the user supplied structure pointed to by RESULT_BUF with
     the information instead of using a static buffer.  The first
     BUFLEN bytes of the additional buffer pointed to by BUFFER are
     used to contain additional information, normally strings which are
     pointed to by the elements of the result structure.

     If a group with ID GID is found, the pointer returned in RESULT
     points to the record which contains the wanted data (i.e., RESULT
     contains the value RESULT_BUF).  If no group is found or if an
     error occurred, the pointer returned in RESULT is a null pointer.
     The function returns zero or an error code.  If the buffer BUFFER
     is too small to contain all the needed information, the error code
     `ERANGE' is returned and ERRNO is set to `ERANGE'.

 -- Function: struct group * getgrnam (const char *NAME)
     Preliminary: | MT-Unsafe race:grnam locale | AS-Unsafe dlopen
     plugin heap lock | AC-Unsafe corrupt lock fd mem | *Note POSIX
     Safety Concepts::.

     This function returns a pointer to a statically-allocated structure
     containing information about the group whose group name is NAME.
     This structure may be overwritten by subsequent calls to
     `getgrnam'.

     A null pointer indicates there is no group named NAME.

 -- Function: int getgrnam_r (const char *NAME, struct group
          *RESULT_BUF, char *BUFFER, size_t BUFLEN, struct group
          **RESULT)
     Preliminary: | MT-Safe locale | AS-Unsafe dlopen plugin heap lock
     | AC-Unsafe corrupt lock fd mem | *Note POSIX Safety Concepts::.

     This function is similar to `getgrnam' in that is returns
     information about the group whose group name is NAME.  Like
     `getgrgid_r', it uses the user supplied buffers in RESULT_BUF and
     BUFFER, not a static buffer.

     The return values are the same as for `getgrgid_r' `ERANGE'.


File: libc.info,  Node: Scanning All Groups,  Prev: Lookup Group,  Up: Group Database

29.14.3 Scanning the List of All Groups
---------------------------------------

This section explains how a program can read the list of all groups in
the system, one group at a time.  The functions described here are
declared in `grp.h'.

   You can use the `fgetgrent' function to read group entries from a
particular file.

 -- Function: struct group * fgetgrent (FILE *STREAM)
     Preliminary: | MT-Unsafe race:fgrent | AS-Unsafe corrupt lock |
     AC-Unsafe corrupt lock | *Note POSIX Safety Concepts::.

     The `fgetgrent' function reads the next entry from STREAM.  It
     returns a pointer to the entry.  The structure is statically
     allocated and is overwritten on subsequent calls to `fgetgrent'.
     You must copy the contents of the structure if you wish to save the
     information.

     The stream must correspond to a file in the same format as the
     standard group database file.

 -- Function: int fgetgrent_r (FILE *STREAM, struct group *RESULT_BUF,
          char *BUFFER, size_t BUFLEN, struct group **RESULT)
     Preliminary: | MT-Safe | AS-Unsafe corrupt | AC-Unsafe corrupt lock
     | *Note POSIX Safety Concepts::.

     This function is similar to `fgetgrent' in that it reads the next
     user entry from STREAM.  But the result is returned in the
     structure pointed to by RESULT_BUF.  The first BUFLEN bytes of the
     additional buffer pointed to by BUFFER are used to contain
     additional information, normally strings which are pointed to by
     the elements of the result structure.

     This stream must correspond to a file in the same format as the
     standard group database file.

     If the function returns zero RESULT points to the structure with
     the wanted data (normally this is in RESULT_BUF).  If errors
     occurred the return value is non-zero and RESULT contains a null
     pointer.

   The way to scan all the entries in the group database is with
`setgrent', `getgrent', and `endgrent'.

 -- Function: void setgrent (void)
     Preliminary: | MT-Unsafe race:grent locale | AS-Unsafe dlopen
     plugin heap lock | AC-Unsafe corrupt lock fd mem | *Note POSIX
     Safety Concepts::.

     This function initializes a stream for reading from the group data
     base.  You use this stream by calling `getgrent' or `getgrent_r'.

 -- Function: struct group * getgrent (void)
     Preliminary: | MT-Unsafe race:grent race:grentbuf locale |
     AS-Unsafe dlopen plugin heap lock | AC-Unsafe corrupt lock fd mem
     | *Note POSIX Safety Concepts::.

     The `getgrent' function reads the next entry from the stream
     initialized by `setgrent'.  It returns a pointer to the entry.  The
     structure is statically allocated and is overwritten on subsequent
     calls to `getgrent'.  You must copy the contents of the structure
     if you wish to save the information.

 -- Function: int getgrent_r (struct group *RESULT_BUF, char *BUFFER,
          size_t BUFLEN, struct group **RESULT)
     Preliminary: | MT-Unsafe race:grent locale | AS-Unsafe dlopen
     plugin heap lock | AC-Unsafe corrupt lock fd mem | *Note POSIX
     Safety Concepts::.

     This function is similar to `getgrent' in that it returns the next
     entry from the stream initialized by `setgrent'.  Like
     `fgetgrent_r', it places the result in user-supplied buffers
     pointed to RESULT_BUF and BUFFER.

     If the function returns zero RESULT contains a pointer to the data
     (normally equal to RESULT_BUF).  If errors occurred the return
     value is non-zero and RESULT contains a null pointer.

 -- Function: void endgrent (void)
     Preliminary: | MT-Unsafe race:grent locale | AS-Unsafe dlopen
     plugin heap lock | AC-Unsafe corrupt lock fd mem | *Note POSIX
     Safety Concepts::.

     This function closes the internal stream used by `getgrent' or
     `getgrent_r'.


File: libc.info,  Node: Database Example,  Next: Netgroup Database,  Prev: Group Database,  Up: Users and Groups

29.15 User and Group Database Example
=====================================

Here is an example program showing the use of the system database
inquiry functions.  The program prints some information about the user
running the program.


     #include <grp.h>
     #include <pwd.h>
     #include <sys/types.h>
     #include <unistd.h>
     #include <stdlib.h>

     int
     main (void)
     {
       uid_t me;
       struct passwd *my_passwd;
       struct group *my_group;
       char **members;

       /* Get information about the user ID. */
       me = getuid ();
       my_passwd = getpwuid (me);
       if (!my_passwd)
         {
           printf ("Couldn't find out about user %d.\n", (int) me);
           exit (EXIT_FAILURE);
         }

       /* Print the information. */
       printf ("I am %s.\n", my_passwd->pw_gecos);
       printf ("My login name is %s.\n", my_passwd->pw_name);
       printf ("My uid is %d.\n", (int) (my_passwd->pw_uid));
       printf ("My home directory is %s.\n", my_passwd->pw_dir);
       printf ("My default shell is %s.\n", my_passwd->pw_shell);

       /* Get information about the default group ID. */
       my_group = getgrgid (my_passwd->pw_gid);
       if (!my_group)
         {
           printf ("Couldn't find out about group %d.\n",
                   (int) my_passwd->pw_gid);
           exit (EXIT_FAILURE);
         }

       /* Print the information. */
       printf ("My default group is %s (%d).\n",
               my_group->gr_name, (int) (my_passwd->pw_gid));
       printf ("The members of this group are:\n");
       members = my_group->gr_mem;
       while (*members)
         {
           printf ("  %s\n", *(members));
           members++;
         }

       return EXIT_SUCCESS;
     }

   Here is some output from this program:

     I am Throckmorton Snurd.
     My login name is snurd.
     My uid is 31093.
     My home directory is /home/fsg/snurd.
     My default shell is /bin/sh.
     My default group is guest (12).
     The members of this group are:
       friedman
       tami


File: libc.info,  Node: Netgroup Database,  Prev: Database Example,  Up: Users and Groups

29.16 Netgroup Database
=======================

* Menu:

* Netgroup Data::                  Data in the Netgroup database and where
                                   it comes from.
* Lookup Netgroup::                How to look for a particular netgroup.
* Netgroup Membership::            How to test for netgroup membership.


File: libc.info,  Node: Netgroup Data,  Next: Lookup Netgroup,  Up: Netgroup Database

29.16.1 Netgroup Data
---------------------

Sometimes it is useful to group users according to other criteria
(*note Group Database::).  E.g., it is useful to associate a certain
group of users with a certain machine.  On the other hand grouping of
host names is not supported so far.

   In Sun Microsystems SunOS appeared a new kind of database, the
netgroup database.  It allows grouping hosts, users, and domains
freely, giving them individual names.  To be more concrete, a netgroup
is a list of triples consisting of a host name, a user name, and a
domain name where any of the entries can be a wildcard entry matching
all inputs.  A last possibility is that names of other netgroups can
also be given in the list specifying a netgroup.  So one can construct
arbitrary hierarchies without loops.

   Sun's implementation allows netgroups only for the `nis' or
`nisplus' service, *note Services in the NSS configuration::.  The
implementation in the GNU C Library has no such restriction.  An entry
in either of the input services must have the following form:

     GROUPNAME ( GROUPNAME | `('HOSTNAME`,'USERNAME`,'`domainname'`)' )+

   Any of the fields in the triple can be empty which means anything
matches.  While describing the functions we will see that the opposite
case is useful as well.  I.e., there may be entries which will not
match any input.  For entries like this, a name consisting of the single
character `-' shall be used.


File: libc.info,  Node: Lookup Netgroup,  Next: Netgroup Membership,  Prev: Netgroup Data,  Up: Netgroup Database

29.16.2 Looking up one Netgroup
-------------------------------

The lookup functions for netgroups are a bit different to all other
system database handling functions.  Since a single netgroup can contain
many entries a two-step process is needed.  First a single netgroup is
selected and then one can iterate over all entries in this netgroup.
These functions are declared in `netdb.h'.

 -- Function: int setnetgrent (const char *NETGROUP)
     Preliminary: | MT-Unsafe race:netgrent locale | AS-Unsafe dlopen
     plugin heap lock | AC-Unsafe corrupt lock fd mem | *Note POSIX
     Safety Concepts::.

     A call to this function initializes the internal state of the
     library to allow following calls of the `getnetgrent' to iterate
     over all entries in the netgroup with name NETGROUP.

     When the call is successful (i.e., when a netgroup with this name
     exists) the return value is `1'.  When the return value is `0' no
     netgroup of this name is known or some other error occurred.

   It is important to remember that there is only one single state for
iterating the netgroups.  Even if the programmer uses the
`getnetgrent_r' function the result is not really reentrant since
always only one single netgroup at a time can be processed.  If the
program needs to process more than one netgroup simultaneously she must
protect this by using external locking.  This problem was introduced in
the original netgroups implementation in SunOS and since we must stay
compatible it is not possible to change this.

   Some other functions also use the netgroups state.  Currently these
are the `innetgr' function and parts of the implementation of the
`compat' service part of the NSS implementation.

 -- Function: int getnetgrent (char **HOSTP, char **USERP, char
          **DOMAINP)
     Preliminary: | MT-Unsafe race:netgrent race:netgrentbuf locale |
     AS-Unsafe dlopen plugin heap lock | AC-Unsafe corrupt lock fd mem
     | *Note POSIX Safety Concepts::.

     This function returns the next unprocessed entry of the currently
     selected netgroup.  The string pointers, in which addresses are
     passed in the arguments HOSTP, USERP, and DOMAINP, will contain
     after a successful call pointers to appropriate strings.  If the
     string in the next entry is empty the pointer has the value `NULL'.
     The returned string pointers are only valid if none of the netgroup
     related functions are called.

     The return value is `1' if the next entry was successfully read.  A
     value of `0' means no further entries exist or internal errors
     occurred.

 -- Function: int getnetgrent_r (char **HOSTP, char **USERP, char
          **DOMAINP, char *BUFFER, size_t BUFLEN)
     Preliminary: | MT-Unsafe race:netgrent locale | AS-Unsafe dlopen
     plugin heap lock | AC-Unsafe corrupt lock fd mem | *Note POSIX
     Safety Concepts::.

     This function is similar to `getnetgrent' with only one exception:
     the strings the three string pointers HOSTP, USERP, and DOMAINP
     point to, are placed in the buffer of BUFLEN bytes starting at
     BUFFER.  This means the returned values are valid even after other
     netgroup related functions are called.

     The return value is `1' if the next entry was successfully read and
     the buffer contains enough room to place the strings in it.  `0' is
     returned in case no more entries are found, the buffer is too
     small, or internal errors occurred.

     This function is a GNU extension.  The original implementation in
     the SunOS libc does not provide this function.

 -- Function: void endnetgrent (void)
     Preliminary: | MT-Unsafe race:netgrent | AS-Unsafe dlopen plugin
     heap lock | AC-Unsafe corrupt lock fd mem | *Note POSIX Safety
     Concepts::.

     This function frees all buffers which were allocated to process
     the last selected netgroup.  As a result all string pointers
     returned by calls to `getnetgrent' are invalid afterwards.


File: libc.info,  Node: Netgroup Membership,  Prev: Lookup Netgroup,  Up: Netgroup Database

29.16.3 Testing for Netgroup Membership
---------------------------------------

It is often not necessary to scan the whole netgroup since often the
only interesting question is whether a given entry is part of the
selected netgroup.

 -- Function: int innetgr (const char *NETGROUP, const char *HOST,
          const char *USER, const char *DOMAIN)
     Preliminary: | MT-Unsafe race:netgrent locale | AS-Unsafe dlopen
     plugin heap lock | AC-Unsafe corrupt lock fd mem | *Note POSIX
     Safety Concepts::.

     This function tests whether the triple specified by the parameters
     HOSTP, USERP, and DOMAINP is part of the netgroup NETGROUP.  Using
     this function has the advantage that

       1. no other netgroup function can use the global netgroup state
          since internal locking is used and

       2. the function is implemented more efficiently than successive
          calls to the other `set'/`get'/`endnetgrent' functions.

     Any of the pointers HOSTP, USERP, and DOMAINP can be `NULL' which
     means any value is accepted in this position.  This is also true
     for the name `-' which should not match any other string otherwise.

     The return value is `1' if an entry matching the given triple is
     found in the netgroup.  The return value is `0' if the netgroup
     itself is not found, the netgroup does not contain the triple or
     internal errors occurred.


File: libc.info,  Node: System Management,  Next: System Configuration,  Prev: Users and Groups,  Up: Top

30 System Management
********************

This chapter describes facilities for controlling the system that
underlies a process (including the operating system and hardware) and
for getting information about it.  Anyone can generally use the
informational facilities, but usually only a properly privileged process
can make changes.

* Menu:

* Host Identification::         Determining the name of the machine.
* Platform Type::               Determining operating system and basic
                                  machine type
* Filesystem Handling::         Controlling/querying mounts
* System Parameters::           Getting and setting various system parameters

   To get information on parameters of the system that are built into
the system, such as the maximum length of a filename, *note System
Configuration::.


File: libc.info,  Node: Host Identification,  Next: Platform Type,  Up: System Management

30.1 Host Identification
========================

This section explains how to identify the particular system on which
your program is running.  First, let's review the various ways computer
systems are named, which is a little complicated because of the history
of the development of the Internet.

   Every Unix system (also known as a host) has a host name, whether
it's connected to a network or not.  In its simplest form, as used
before computer networks were an issue, it's just a word like `chicken'.  

   But any system attached to the Internet or any network like it
conforms to a more rigorous naming convention as part of the Domain
Name System (DNS).  In DNS, every host name is composed of two parts: 

  1. hostname 

  2. domain name 

   You will note that "hostname" looks a lot like "host name", but is
not the same thing, and that people often incorrectly refer to entire
host names as "domain names."

   In DNS, the full host name is properly called the FQDN (Fully
Qualified Domain Name) and consists of the hostname, then a period,
then the domain name.  The domain name itself usually has multiple
components separated by periods.  So for example, a system's hostname
may be `chicken' and its domain name might be `ai.mit.edu', so its FQDN
(which is its host name) is `chicken.ai.mit.edu'.  

   Adding to the confusion, though, is that DNS is not the only name
space in which a computer needs to be known.  Another name space is the
NIS (aka YP) name space.  For NIS purposes, there is another domain
name, which is called the NIS domain name or the YP domain name.  It
need not have anything to do with the DNS domain name.  

   Confusing things even more is the fact that in DNS, it is possible
for multiple FQDNs to refer to the same system.  However, there is
always exactly one of them that is the true host name, and it is called
the canonical FQDN.

   In some contexts, the host name is called a "node name."

   For more information on DNS host naming, see *note Host Names::.

   Prototypes for these functions appear in `unistd.h'.

   The programs `hostname', `hostid', and `domainname' work by calling
these functions.

 -- Function: int gethostname (char *NAME, size_t SIZE)
     Preliminary: | MT-Safe | AS-Safe | AC-Safe | *Note POSIX Safety
     Concepts::.

     This function returns the host name of the system on which it is
     called, in the array NAME.  The SIZE argument specifies the size of
     this array, in bytes.  Note that this is _not_ the DNS hostname.
     If the system participates in DNS, this is the FQDN (see above).

     The return value is `0' on success and `-1' on failure.  In the
     GNU C Library, `gethostname' fails if SIZE is not large enough;
     then you can try again with a larger array.  The following `errno'
     error condition is defined for this function:

    `ENAMETOOLONG'
          The SIZE argument is less than the size of the host name plus
          one.

     On some systems, there is a symbol for the maximum possible host
     name length: `MAXHOSTNAMELEN'.  It is defined in `sys/param.h'.
     But you can't count on this to exist, so it is cleaner to handle
     failure and try again.

     `gethostname' stores the beginning of the host name in NAME even
     if the host name won't entirely fit.  For some purposes, a
     truncated host name is good enough.  If it is, you can ignore the
     error code.

 -- Function: int sethostname (const char *NAME, size_t LENGTH)
     Preliminary: | MT-Safe | AS-Safe | AC-Safe | *Note POSIX Safety
     Concepts::.

     The `sethostname' function sets the host name of the system that
     calls it to NAME, a string with length LENGTH.  Only privileged
     processes are permitted to do this.

     Usually `sethostname' gets called just once, at system boot time.
     Often, the program that calls it sets it to the value it finds in
     the file `/etc/hostname'.  

     Be sure to set the host name to the full host name, not just the
     DNS hostname (see above).

     The return value is `0' on success and `-1' on failure.  The
     following `errno' error condition is defined for this function:

    `EPERM'
          This process cannot set the host name because it is not
          privileged.

 -- Function: int getdomainnname (char *NAME, size_t LENGTH)
     Preliminary: | MT-Safe | AS-Safe | AC-Safe | *Note POSIX Safety
     Concepts::.

     `getdomainname' returns the NIS (aka YP) domain name of the system
     on which it is called.  Note that this is not the more popular DNS
     domain name.  Get that with `gethostname'.

     The specifics of this function are analogous to `gethostname',
     above.


 -- Function: int setdomainname (const char *NAME, size_t LENGTH)
     Preliminary: | MT-Safe | AS-Safe | AC-Safe | *Note POSIX Safety
     Concepts::.

     `getdomainname' sets the NIS (aka YP) domain name of the system on
     which it is called.  Note that this is not the more popular DNS
     domain name.  Set that with `sethostname'.

     The specifics of this function are analogous to `sethostname',
     above.


 -- Function: long int gethostid (void)
     Preliminary: | MT-Safe hostid env locale | AS-Unsafe dlopen plugin
     corrupt heap lock | AC-Unsafe lock corrupt mem fd | *Note POSIX
     Safety Concepts::.

     This function returns the "host ID" of the machine the program is
     running on.  By convention, this is usually the primary Internet
     IP address of that machine, converted to a `long int'.  However,
     on some systems it is a meaningless but unique number which is
     hard-coded for each machine.

     This is not widely used.  It arose in BSD 4.2, but was dropped in
     BSD 4.4.  It is not required by POSIX.

     The proper way to query the IP address is to use `gethostbyname'
     on the results of `gethostname'.  For more information on IP
     addresses, *Note Host Addresses::.

 -- Function: int sethostid (long int ID)
     Preliminary: | MT-Unsafe const:hostid | AS-Unsafe | AC-Unsafe
     corrupt fd | *Note POSIX Safety Concepts::.

     The `sethostid' function sets the "host ID" of the host machine to
     ID.  Only privileged processes are permitted to do this.  Usually
     it happens just once, at system boot time.

     The proper way to establish the primary IP address of a system is
     to configure the IP address resolver to associate that IP address
     with the system's host name as returned by `gethostname'.  For
     example, put a record for the system in `/etc/hosts'.

     See `gethostid' above for more information on host ids.

     The return value is `0' on success and `-1' on failure.  The
     following `errno' error conditions are defined for this function:

    `EPERM'
          This process cannot set the host name because it is not
          privileged.

    `ENOSYS'
          The operating system does not support setting the host ID.
          On some systems, the host ID is a meaningless but unique
          number hard-coded for each machine.


File: libc.info,  Node: Platform Type,  Next: Filesystem Handling,  Prev: Host Identification,  Up: System Management

30.2 Platform Type Identification
=================================

You can use the `uname' function to find out some information about the
type of computer your program is running on.  This function and the
associated data type are declared in the header file `sys/utsname.h'.  

   As a bonus, `uname' also gives some information identifying the
particular system your program is running on.  This is the same
information which you can get with functions targeted to this purpose
described in *note Host Identification::.

 -- Data Type: struct utsname
     The `utsname' structure is used to hold information returned by
     the `uname' function.  It has the following members:

    `char sysname[]'
          This is the name of the operating system in use.

    `char release[]'
          This is the current release level of the operating system
          implementation.

    `char version[]'
          This is the current version level within the release of the
          operating system.

    `char machine[]'
          This is a description of the type of hardware that is in use.

          Some systems provide a mechanism to interrogate the kernel
          directly for this information.  On systems without such a
          mechanism, the GNU C Library fills in this field based on the
          configuration name that was specified when building and
          installing the library.

          GNU uses a three-part name to describe a system
          configuration; the three parts are CPU, MANUFACTURER and
          SYSTEM-TYPE, and they are separated with dashes.  Any
          possible combination of three names is potentially
          meaningful, but most such combinations are meaningless in
          practice and even the meaningful ones are not necessarily
          supported by any particular GNU program.

          Since the value in `machine' is supposed to describe just the
          hardware, it consists of the first two parts of the
          configuration name: `CPU-MANUFACTURER'.  For example, it
          might be one of these:

               `"sparc-sun"', `"i386-ANYTHING"', `"m68k-hp"',
               `"m68k-sony"', `"m68k-sun"', `"mips-dec"'

    `char nodename[]'
          This is the host name of this particular computer.  In the
          GNU C Library, the value is the same as that returned by
          `gethostname'; see *note Host Identification::.

          gethostname() is implemented with a call to uname().

    `char domainname[]'
          This is the NIS or YP domain name.  It is the same value
          returned by `getdomainname'; see *note Host Identification::.
          This element is a relatively recent invention and use of it
          is not as portable as use of the rest of the structure.


 -- Function: int uname (struct utsname *INFO)
     Preliminary: | MT-Safe | AS-Safe | AC-Safe | *Note POSIX Safety
     Concepts::.

     The `uname' function fills in the structure pointed to by INFO
     with information about the operating system and host machine.  A
     non-negative value indicates that the data was successfully stored.

     `-1' as the value indicates an error.  The only error possible is
     `EFAULT', which we normally don't mention as it is always a
     possibility.


File: libc.info,  Node: Filesystem Handling,  Next: System Parameters,  Prev: Platform Type,  Up: System Management

30.3 Controlling and Querying Mounts
====================================

All files are in filesystems, and before you can access any file, its
filesystem must be mounted.  Because of Unix's concept of _Everything
is a file_, mounting of filesystems is central to doing almost
anything.  This section explains how to find out what filesystems are
currently mounted and what filesystems are available for mounting, and
how to change what is mounted.

   The classic filesystem is the contents of a disk drive.  The concept
is considerably more abstract, though, and lots of things other than
disk drives can be mounted.

   Some block devices don't correspond to traditional devices like disk
drives.  For example, a loop device is a block device whose driver uses
a regular file in another filesystem as its medium.  So if that regular
file contains appropriate data for a filesystem, you can by mounting the
loop device essentially mount a regular file.

   Some filesystems aren't based on a device of any kind.  The "proc"
filesystem, for example, contains files whose data is made up by the
filesystem driver on the fly whenever you ask for it.  And when you
write to it, the data you write causes changes in the system.  No data
gets stored.

* Menu:

* Mount Information::           What is or could be mounted?
* Mount-Unmount-Remount::       Controlling what is mounted and how


File: libc.info,  Node: Mount Information,  Next: Mount-Unmount-Remount,  Up: Filesystem Handling

30.3.1 Mount Information
------------------------

For some programs it is desirable and necessary to access information
about whether a certain filesystem is mounted and, if it is, where, or
simply to get lists of all the available filesystems.  The GNU C Library
provides some functions to retrieve this information portably.

   Traditionally Unix systems have a file named `/etc/fstab' which
describes all possibly mounted filesystems.  The `mount' program uses
this file to mount at startup time of the system all the necessary
filesystems.  The information about all the filesystems actually
mounted is normally kept in a file named either `/var/run/mtab' or
`/etc/mtab'.  Both files share the same syntax and it is crucial that
this syntax is followed all the time.  Therefore it is best to never
directly write the files.  The functions described in this section can
do this and they also provide the functionality to convert the external
textual representation to the internal representation.

   Note that the `fstab' and `mtab' files are maintained on a system by
_convention_.  It is possible for the files not to exist or not to be
consistent with what is really mounted or available to mount, if the
system's administration policy allows it.  But programs that mount and
unmount filesystems typically maintain and use these files as described
herein.

   The filenames given above should never be used directly.  The
portable way to handle these file is to use the macro `_PATH_FSTAB',
defined in `fstab.h', or `_PATH_MNTTAB', defined in `mntent.h' and
`paths.h', for `fstab'; and the macro `_PATH_MOUNTED', also defined in
`mntent.h' and `paths.h', for `mtab'.  There are also two alternate
macro names `FSTAB', `MNTTAB', and `MOUNTED' defined but these names
are deprecated and kept only for backward compatibility.  The names
`_PATH_MNTTAB' and `_PATH_MOUNTED' should always be used.

* Menu:

* fstab::                       The `fstab' file
* mtab::                        The `mtab' file
* Other Mount Information::     Other (non-libc) sources of mount information